FIZIKMOZAC

CHAPTER 6: WAVES
Learning Outcome
6.1
Waves
6.2
Reflection of Waves
6.3
Refraction of waves
6.4
Diffraction of Waves
6.5
Interference of Waves
6.6
Sound Waves
6.7
Electromagnetic Waves
Paper 2: Section B & C
Paper 3

2
3
13
14
16
22
31
35
37
42

CHAPTER 7: ELECTRICITY
Learning Outcome
49
7.1
Electric field and charge flow
50
7.2
The relationship between electric 55
Current and potential difference
7.3
Series and parallel circuits
64
7.4
Electromotive force and
74
Internal resistance
7.5
Electrical energy and power
80
Paper 2: Section B and C
84
Paper 3
88
CHAPTER 8: ELECTROMAGNETISM
Learning Outcomes
93
8.1
Magnetic effect of a current94
Carrying conductor
8.2
The force on a current102
Carrying conductor in a magnetic field
8.3
Electromagnetic Induction
111
8.4
Transformers
123
8.5
Generation and transmission of
Electricity
129
Paper 2: Section B and C
134
Paper 3
139
CHAPTER 9: ELECTRONIC
Learning Outcomes
9.1
Cathode ray oscilloscope
9.2
Semiconductor diodes
9.3
Transistors
9.4
Logic Gate
Paper 2: Section B and C

142
143
153
165
174
182

CHAPTER 10: RADIOACTIVITY

Learning Outcomes
10.1
Nucleus of an atom
10.2
Radioactive decay
10.3
Radioisotopes
10.4
Nuclear energy
Paper 2: Section B and C

186
187
189
197
202
206

FIZIKMOZAC

Tutorial

Paper 2
B

Paper 3
A
B

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
Total

Pape
r
1
18
7
7
3
13
8
8
64

6
1
1
3
11

1
1
1
3

1
1
2

3
3

1
1
1
3

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Total

6
10
19
7
8
50

1
2
4
1
3
11

1
1

1
2
3

2
1
1
4

3
3

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
Total

16
10
13
10
8
57

4
3
4
3
14

1
1
1
3

1
1

2
1
1
1
5

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
Total

11
24
15
18
68

3
3
5
5
16

1/2
1/2
1

10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
Total

6
14
14
15
49

1
3
2
1
7

1
2
3

1
2
1
4

How to use this module?

1. Listen carefully to all explanation from your teacher. Be proactive in class. Do all the activities during class
lesson. Ask question if you have any problem understanding.
2. Jot down all the information you get during class.
3. Do the Tutorial immediately after class. It is your physics homework. Visit blog: fizikmozac.blogspot.com to
check for the answer
4. Use this book for the revision. Check for the learning outcomes
LIKE FB: Fizik mozac

FIZIKMOZAC

LEARNING OUTCOMES
6.1 WAVES
Describe what is meant by
wave motion

Recognize that waves

transfer energy without
transferring matters

Compare transverse and

longitudinal waves and give
examples of each

State what is meant by a

wavefront

State the direction of

propagation of waves in
relations to wave fronts

Define amplitude, period,

frequency, wavelength and
speed of wave

Sketch and interpret a

displacement time graph and
displacement-distance graph

Clarify the relationship

between speed, wavelength
and frequency

Describe damping in an
oscillating system

6.2 REFLECTION OF WAVES

Describe reflection of waves
in terms of the angle of
incidence, angle of reflection
wavelength, frequency,
speed and direction of
propagation

Draw a diagram to show

reflection of wave
6.4 DIFFRACTION OF WAVES

Describe reflection of waves

in terms of wavelength,
frequency, speed and
direction of propagation and
shape of wave

Draw a diagram to show

reflection of wave

6.3 REFRACTION OF WAVES

Describe refraction of waves
in terms of the angle of
incidence, angle of
refraction wavelength,
frequency, speed and
direction of propagation

Draw a diagram to show

refraction of wave
6.5 INTERFERENCE OF WAVES

State the principle of

superposition

Explain the interference of

waves

Draw interference patterns

Interpret interference
patterns

Solve problem = ax/D

6.6 SOUND WAVES

Describe sound waves

Explain how the loudness relates to amplitude

Explain how the pitch relates to frequency

Describe applications of reflection of sound waves

Calculate distances using the reflection of sound wave

Describe resonance in an
oscillating system.
6.7 ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

Describe the electromagnetic spectrum

State the visible light is a part of the electromagnetic spectrum

List sources of electromagnetic waves

Describe the properties of electromagnetic waves

Describe application of electromagnetic waves

Describe the detrimental effects of excessive exposure to certain components of the electromagnetic
spectrum.

FIZIKMOZAC

8.

Nuclear physics study of nuclear structure

and their application

1.1

We observe many occurrences around us which

are known as the natural phenomena. We also
creates things which can make our life easier.
All these can be explained using the concepts
of physics.

Activity 2: Field of study in physics

phenomena &
Field of study
Occurrence Around us
in physics
1.
Car racing
2.
3.
4.

Activity 1: Name three phenomena around us.

5.

Recognise the physics in every-day objects & in

natural phenomena
Knowledge of physics is grouped into different
fields of study.
1.

Force and Motion Investigates the action of

force and motion

2.

Heat studies the influence of heat on

different types of matter

3.

Light Explains the different phenomena due

to light

4.

Waves understand the properties of

different types of waves and their uses

5.

Electricity investigates about current flows

and potential difference.

6.

Electromagnetism investigates interactions

of electric and magnetic field

7.

Electronic studies the use of electronic

devices in various fields

rainbow in the
sky

What is Physics?
Study of ___________ phenomena and the
properties of matter

cooking in the
kitchen

Shadow on the
ground
Nuclear bomb

6.

Light bulb lights

up during night
7.
communicating
using mobile phone
8. Memory chip in a
computer
9. Radioterapy and
chemoteraphy to cure
cancer
10. Fiber optics in
communication
11. Satelite
12. Generation of
electricity
13. Archeology
14. Robotics
15. Supersonic jet and
rocket

FIZIKMOZAC

1.2
In learning physics, we need to carry out
investigations. We gather information
through observations and taking
measurement. We measure many types of
physical quantities.

Physical Quantities is a physical characteristic that can be ______________.

The value of the measurement consists of a ___________ and a _________
Examples :

All physical quantities can be classified into two groups :

1.__________________________
2. _________________________
What are base quantities??

Activity 1: List of 5 basic physical quantities and their units.

S.I. Unit and
Base quantity
Symbol
symbol
Length
Mass
Time
Current
Temperature
What are derived quantities?

FIZIKMOZAC

Activity 2: Determine the derived unit for the following derived quantities.
1. Area = length x width

2.

Volume = length x width x height

3.

Density = mass
Volume

4.

Velocity = displacement
Time

5.

Momentum = mass x velocity

6.

Acceleration = change in velocity

Time

7.

Force = mass x acceleration

8.

Pressure = Force
Area

9.

Work = Force x displacement

10. Power = Work

Time

Prefix
Tera
T
Giga,
G
Mega,
M
Kilo,
k
Hekto,
h
Deka
D
Deci
d
Centi
c
Mili,,
m
Micro

Nano
n
Piko
p

Value
1 000 000 000 000
1 000 000 000
1 000 000
1 000
100
10
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.000 001
0.000 000 001
0.000 000 000 001

Standard form

Note that the physical quantities such as width,

thickness, height, distance, displacement, perimeter,
radius and diameter are equivalent to length.
Exersise 1
1. The extension of an elastic spring is directly
proportional to the stretching force acting on it.
It can be shown by the following formula:
F = kx where F = the force (unit N)
k = spring constant
x = the extension (unit m)
Determine the unit of the spring constant k.
Activity 3: Prefix
Prefix is used to simplify the expression of very big
or very small numerical values of physical quantities.
The values of measurements which is either very
large of very small are written in Standard Form
so as to be neater, brief and easier to read.
Standard form = A x 10n ,
1Express
< A < 10 quantities
and n = integer
using standard form

FIZIKMOZAC

a.
b.

2. Write the following quantities in standard form :

Radius of the earth = 6 370 000 m =
Mass of an electron
= 0.000 000 000 911 kg =.................
c.

Size of a particle = 0.000 03 m

=

d.

Diameter of an atom = 0.000 000 072 m

=

e.

Wavelength of light = 0.000 000 55 m

3. Complete the table below

1 Tm = __________m

1 m = _________ Tm

1 Gm = __________ m

1 m = ________ Gm

1 Mm = __________ m 1 m = ________ Mm
1 km = __________ m

1 m = ________ km

1 hm = __________ m

1 m = _________hm

1 cm = __________ m

1 m = ________ cm

1 mm = __________ m 1 m = ________ mm
1 m = __________ m

1 m = ________ m

1 nm = __________ m

1 m = ________ nm

1 pm = __________ m

1 m = ________ pm

4. Convert the measurement into SI unit and in standard form:

a. Radio Melaka Frequency of radio wave
= 102.3 MHz = _______________
b. Diameter of the earth = 12 800 km = ________________________
c. Mass of the earth
= 6 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 0000 g
= ________
d.

The height of Petronas Twin Towers is

452 000 mm = _______________

FIZIKMOZAC

e. The wavelength of a visible light is

0.00042 mm = ________________
5.

Convert each of the following measurements into metre, m

(a) 2.98 Tm =
(b) 2.98 km =
(c) 2.98 m =
(d) 2.98 x 10-1 Gm =
(e) 2.98 x 10-3 Mm =
(f) 2.98 x 107 nm
(g) 2.98 x 104 m =
6.

Convert

a)

4 m2 into the units of cm2

b)
c)

30 cm2 into the units of m2

2.5 m2 to unit of mm2

d)

500 mm2 into the units of m2

e)

200 m3 into the units of mm3

f)

11.5 cm3 into the units of m3

(g) 72 km h-1 into the units of ms-1

(h) 5 g cm-3 into the units of kg m-3

6. The pressure exerted by a box on a surface is 500 N cm 2. What is the pressure in units of Pa?
( 1 Pa = 1 N m - 2 )

TUTORIAL 1.1
1. Which of the following physical quantities is not a base quantity? (2006)
A. Weight

FIZIKMOZAC

B.
C.
D.

A.
B.
C.
D.

Time
Temperature
Electric current

2.

Which physical quantity has the correct S.I unit? (2003)

Physical quantity
S.I unit
A Temperature
Celcius
B Time
Minute
C Mass
Newton
D Length
Metre

3.

Which of the following is a derived quantity?

(2007)
A. Mass
C. Weight
B. Length
D. Temperature

4.

30 miliseconds is equivalent to (2003)

A. 3 x 10-5 s
C. 3 x 10-3 s
-4
B. 3 x 10 s
D. 3 x 10-2 s

5.

Which of the following frequencies is the same as 106.8 MHz? (2004)

A. 1.068 x 10-1 Hz
B. 1.068 x 102 Hz
C. 1.068 x 106 Hz
D. 1.068 x 108 Hz

5.

A radio station airs its programmes by transmitting waves at a frequency of 102.3 MHz. How much is
the frequency in Hz? (2006)
A.
1.023 x 102
B.
1.023 x 105
C.
1.023 x 106
D.
1.023 x 108

6.

Which of the following values is equal to 470 pF? (2007)

A.
4.7 x 10-10 F
B.
4.7 x 10-7 F
C.
4.7 x 102 F
D.
4.7 x 1011 F

7. Hamid cycles at a velocity of 3.1 km h-1. What is this velocity, in m s-1? (2008)
0.09
0.86
1.16
11.61
8.

What is 0.0455 kg expressed in standard form?

A 0.455 x 10 - 1 kg
B 4.55 x 10 - 2 kg
C 45.5 x 10 - 3 kg
D 455 x 10 - 4 kg

9.

Which measurement is the longest? (2009)

A.
2.68 x 103 m
B.
2.68 x 10-1 mm
C.
2.68 x 103 cm
D.
2.68 x 10-4 m

10. The prefixes according to their value in ascending order are

A Giga,mega,kilo,centi
B Mikro,mili,centi,kilo
C Mega,giga,kilo,centi
D Centi,giga,mikro,mili
11. Which one of the following measurements is different?
A 2.3 x 10 2 m

FIZIKMOZAC

B 2.3 x 10 4 cm
C 2.3 x 10 6 mm
12. The volume of a metal sphere is 12 cm3.
This volume in units of m 3 is
A 1.2 x 10 - 2
B
1.2 x 10 - 3
C 1.2 x 10 - 5
D
1.2 x 10 7
E 1.2 x 10 - 9
A.
B.
C.
D.

13. The acceleration of a trolley is 2000 cm s- 2. This acceleration in S.I. unit is

0.02
0.2
2
20

1.3

Define Scalar & Vector quantities

Scalar quantities: ..

Vector quantities: .

Activity 1
1. Study the following description of events carefully and then decide which events require magnitude,
direction or both to specify them.
Description of events

Magnitud
e

Directio
n

Walk 500 m and youll

find the shop
Walk 500 m left from the
junction and youll find
the shop
The temperature in the
room is 25 0C
The location of Ayer
Hitam is 60 km to the
north-west of Johor
Bahru
The power of the electric
bulb is 80 W
A car is travelling at 80
km/hr from Johor Bahru
to Kuala Lumpur
2.

Give examples of scalar and vector quantities

Scalar Quantities

Vector Quantities

3. Given the formula:

Acceleration
= Final velocity Initial velocity
Time taken
From the above formula:

10

FIZIKMOZAC

Scalar quantities : _____________________

Vector quantities : _____________________

1.4
Measure physical quantities using appropriate instruments
Two potatoes are put on the digital balance but the balance does not show any reading. Instead, it
shows E.
E stands for error. The digital balances indicates E because the potatoes are too ________ and their
weight is beyond the maximum capacity of the balance

When dried mushrooms are place on an ordinary weighing scale, the pointer shows 0, Why?
The weighing scale shows zero reading because the dried mushrooms are too _______ for the scale to
response.
When we measure a physical quantity, we need
to consider its magnitude and then choose a
suitable instrument. The magnitude of the
quantity should not exceed the maximum
capacity of the instrument, and the instrument
must be sensitive enough to detect and give
meaningful measurement of the quantity.

Activity 1
Measuring physical quantities using appropriate instruments
Aim: To measure physical quantities using appropriate instruments.
Apparatus: Micrometer screw gauge, vernier calipers, metre rule, stopwatch, measuring cylinder 50 ml,
measuring cylinder 500 ml, beaker
Physical
Instrument
Readings
Quantities
The length of the
laboratory table
The length of a
book
The diameter of
beaker
The diameter of a
copper wire
The volume of
water in a beaker
The volume of
water in a spoon
The time for 10
pulses of your
heartbeat
The time taken to
walk around the
laboratory twice

11

FIZIKMOZAC

1.

What criteria do you consider when you choose an instrument to measure a quantity?
____________________________________

2.

Suggest a suitable instrument when measuring the following quantities.

(a) The mass of a wooden block :
..
(b) The current that flows in a circuit:
..
(c) The voltage of a battery:

Explain Consistency and Accuracy

Consistency: ..

Accuracy:

Activity 2
1. The diagram shows the result for four shooters A, B , C and D in a tournament. Every shooters shot
five times .
The table shows the conclusion . Write either high / low

Shooter
A

Consistency

Accuracy

B
C
D
2.

The diameter of a pipe is measured four times and the values of the measurement are 3.51 cm, 3.50
cm, 3.53 cm and 3.51 cm. If the actual value of the diameter is 3.31 cm, comment on the consistency
and accuracy of the measurement. Explain your answer.

12

FIZIKMOZAC

(a)

Consistency: ...
Explanation: .............
..

(b) Accuracy: ..
Explanation: .
..
Explain Sensitivity
Sensitivity:
..
..
Activity 3
Aim: To determine the sensitivity of some measuring instruments
Procedure:
Determine the smallest magnitude of the quantity which can be detected by each instrument and state its
sensitivity.
Measuring instrument
Smallest magnitude of quantity
Measuring tape
Ruler
Vernier Calipers
Micrometer Screw gauge
Wall clock
Stopwatch
Thermometer

The sensitivity of different types of ammeter.

13

FIZIKMOZAC

Double-scale ammeter
What is the Sensitivity (smallest division)?
Range

: 0 1 A :

Range:

0 5 A :

Milliammeter( Range : 0 50 mA)

What is the Sensitivity (smallest division)?

Double scale ammeter

sensitivity of upper scale : _____________
Sensitivity of lower scale : ________
Reading : ___________

14

FIZIKMOZAC

Which is more sensitive? Why?

Measuring Time

Sensitivity: ..
Reading:
Measurement Temperature
Sensitivity: ..

Exercise 1:

1.

Minah, Mary and Malika were asked to measure the diameter of a test tube in the laboratory. The
actual diameter of the test tube is 2.75 cm. Each of them measured the diameter three times at three
different places on the test tube. Their measurements are shown in the table.

(a) What instrument was used to measure the diameter of the test tube?
__________________________________
(b) What instrument should we use to get more accurate readings?

2.

Group A and group B do an experiment to measure the period of a simple pendulum five times and
the results are shown in the table. State which groups measurements are more consistent and
explain why.

15

FIZIKMOZAC

.
Activity 4:
Explain types of experimental error and use appropriate techniques to reduce errors
Name 2 types of errors.
1.

2.

1.

Systematic errors:

Defination: ..
.
.
Examples:
2.

Random errors:

Defination: ..
.
.
Examples:
Zero Error
What is zero error?
.
.
How to avoid zero error?
.
..
Parallax Error
What is parallax error?
.
How to avoid parallax error?
1.

..
2.

.
Activity 5:
Sample of measuring instruments
1. Ammeter : is used to measure __________

16

FIZIKMOZAC

2.

3.

Measuring cylinder is used to measure

.

Ruler : is used to measure

Reading = cm
4. Vernier calliper
A venier calliper is used to measure :
a.

b.

A vernier calliper gives readings to an accuracy of _________ cm.

17

FIZIKMOZAC

1 cm on main scale is divided into 10 divisions.

Length of 1 division on main scale = _____ cm
Length of vernier scale = ________ cm
Vernier scale is divided into 10 divisions
Length of 1 divisions on vernier scale

= _______ cm

The difference between the main scale and vernier scale is = _______ cm

0
cm

Main scale: ..
Vernier scale: ..
Reading:

18

FIZIKMOZAC

Vernier calliper reading = _______

Vernier calliper reading = ____________

Vernier calliper reading = ____________

No Zero error:

19

FIZIKMOZAC

Positive zero error:

Zero error = ____________ cm
Correct reading
= observed reading zero error
5. Micrometer screw gauge.
A micrometer screw gauge is used to measure::
a. __________________________________
b.

___________________________________

One complete turn of the thimble

(50 division) moves the spindle by 0.50 mm.
Division of thimble
= _________ mm = _______ cm
A accuracy of micrometer screw gauge = _______
cm

Main scale: __________ Vernier scale: ________

Reading: ___________________

20

FIZIKMOZAC

Main scale: __________ Vernier scale: ________

Reading: ___________________
No zero error

Positive zero error

Zero error = __________

Negative zero error

Zero error = __________

Exercise 3:

21

FIZIKMOZAC

Vernier Callipers And Micrometer Screw Gauge

1. Write down the readings shown by the following

(a)
Answer:
(b)

Answer: .
(c)

Answer:
(d)

Answer: ..
2. (a)

The following diagram shows the scale of a vernier calliper when the jaws are closed.

Zero error = __________ cm

(b). The following diagram shows the scale of the same vernier calliper when there are 40 pieces of
cardboard between the jaws.

22

FIZIKMOZAC

Reading shown: ..
Corrected reading: ..
3.

Write down the readings shown by the following micrometer screw gauges.

Answer: .

Answer:..

Answer: _________________

(d)

Answer:
4.(a) Determine the readings of the following micrometer screw gauges.

23

FIZIKMOZAC

Zero error = ___________

Zero error = ________

(b) Determine the readings of the following micrometer screw gauges.

Zero error:

Reading shown = .
Corrected reading = .

5.

Write down the readings shown by the following micrometer screw gauges.

15

Answer: ____________

24

FIZIKMOZAC

Answer: ___________
TUTORIAL 1.3
1.

The ability of an instrument gives consistent reading , when repeated readings are taken is called
as
A accuracy
B
precision
C sensitivity
D
error

2.

The ability of an instrument to detect a slight change that occurs in the measured quantity is called
as
A precision
B
accuracy
C sensitivity
D
error

3.

A, B, C and D show the shooting marks on a target. Which marks can explain the concept of
precision of a measurement? (2005)

4.

Which of the following is most likely to show an accurate shooting but

not so presicely?

9.

A
B
C
D

The following table shows the readings measured by using different measuring instruments X, Y dan
Z.
Measuring
Reading /
instrument
mm
X
2.38
Y
52
Z
6.5
Which of the following is true?
X
Y
Z
Ruler
Vernier
mikrometer
calipers
screw
gauge
Vernier Mikrometer Measuring
calipers screw gauge tape
Measuring Ruler
Vernier
Tape
calipers
Mikrometer Ruler
Vernier
Screw gauge
Calipers

25

FIZIKMOZAC

10. Table shows readings of the thickness of a book measured by four different students. Which of the
students recorded the true readings.

A
B
C
D

Student

Ruler
/ cm

W
X
Y
Z

2.17
2.174
2.17
2.2

Vernier
calipers
/ cm
2.2
2.2
2.174
2.17

Mikrometer
screw
gauge /cm
2.174
2.17
2.2
2.174

11. Which comparison is correct about the sensitivity of the vernier calipers and the metre rule when
measuring the thickness of a wire? (2004)
Vernier calipers
Metre rule
A Low sensitivity
Low sensitivity
B Low sensitivity
High sensitivity
C High sensitivity
Low sensitivity
D High sensitivity
High sensitivity
12. Diagram 1 shows the target board in a game.

Which result is consistent but not accurate? (2008)

13. The focal length of a convex lens is 12 cm. If the focal length is measured by using a ruler, the
reading recorded ought to be
A 11.9 cm B
B. 12.0 cm
C 12.00 cm
D. 12.1 cm
14. The following diagram shows a vernier calipers.

What is the reading of the vernier calipers?

A 3.17 cmB
3.08 cm
C 2.18 cmC
2.07 cm
15. The thickness of a paper is measured by using a micrometer screw gauge should be recorded as
A 2 mm
B 2.1 mm
C 2.14 mm
D 2.142 mm
16. Figure(a) shows the existence of zero error of a vernier calipers. Figure(b) shows the reading of the
vernier calipers for diameter of metal sphere.

26

FIZIKMOZAC

The actual reading of diameter of the metal sphere is

A 2.02 cmB
2.04 cm
C 2.06 cmD
2.08 cm

17. Diagram shows a micrometer screw gauge reading when it is closed at its gap.

The subsequent readings must be corrected by

A adding 0.02 mm
B subtracting 0.02 mm
C adding 0.03 mm
D subtracting 0.03 mm
18.

Based on the diagram above, the thickness of a sheet of paper is

A 3.25 cm
B
3.75 cm
C 0.325 cm
D
0.0375 cm
19. Figure(a) shows the existence of zero error of a micrometer screw gauge. Figure(b) shows the
reading of the micrometer screw gauge for diameter of metal wire.

27

FIZIKMOZAC

The actual reading of diameter of the metal wire is

A 8.30 mm
B 8.32 mm
C 8.80 mm
D 8.82 mm
20. Which of the following increase the sensitivity of a mercury thermometer? (2011)
A. Increases the length of the capillary tube
B. Decreases the length of the capillary tube
C. Increases the diameter of the capillary tube
D. Decreases the diameter of the capillary tube
21. A, B, C and D show parts of four different balance scales. Which balance is the most sensitive?
(2007)

22. Diagram 1 shows the position of a vernier scale at the main scale of a vernier calipers.

What is the value of s? (2011)

A. 0.15 cm
B. 0.55 cm
C. 0.65 cm
D. 0.85 cm

28

FIZIKMOZAC

1.5

When physicists observe a particular physical

phenomenon they will as questions as to how or why it happens. A hypothesis will be put forth and
experiments or scientific investigations will be carried out to prove or disprove the hypothesis. If the
experiments bear out the hypothesis, the hypothesis may come to regarded as theory or law of nature. If
the dont the hypothesis will be rejected or modified.
In any experiment , the report on the experiment will be based on these guidelines and follows a
sequence as shown in the following flow chart:
Inference
Hypothesis
Manipulated variable
Responding variable
Fixed variable
Aim

29

FIZIKMOZAC

Apparatus
Procedure
Tabulating the data
Analyzing the data

Example: SPM 2003 paper 3

A student carries out an experiment to find out the relationship between the change in length , y , of a
spring and mass, m , of the load on the spring. The arrangement of the apparatus for the experiment is
shown in Figure 1 . The length of the spring when a load is placed on the piston is l .

At the beginning of the experiment there is no load. The length of the spring is lo . The actual length of
lo is shown in Figure 2.
The experiment is repeated by using load with mass , m , equal to 0.5 kg , 1.0 kg , 1.5 kg , 2.0 kg and 2.5
kg. The actual lengths of the spring when the different masses are used are shown in Figure 3, Figure 4 ,
Figure 5 , Figure 6 and Figure 7.
(a) Based on the aim and the procedure of the experiment state the:
(i) manipulated variable: _________________
(ii) responding variable: __________________
(iii) constant variable _____________________
(b) Measure the length of the spring in Figure 2.
lo = ___________________
Measure the lengths l of the spring in Figure 3 , Figure 4 , Figure 5 , Figure 6 and Figure 7 when different
load are used.
In each case, calculate the change in length, y , of the spring where; y = ( lo l )
Tabulate your results for m ,l and y in the space below.

(c) On the graph paper , plot a graph of y against m.

(d) Based on your graph, state the relationship between y and m .

30

FIZIKMOZAC

_____________________________________

31

FIZIKMOZAC

32

FIZIKMOZAC

33

FIZIKMOZAC

Activity 2
A student carries out an experiment to investigate
the relationship between the length, L, of a coil of
wire wound round a test tube and its number of
turns, n. Vernier calipers are used to measure the
length, L, of the coil.

Describe the arrangement of the apparatus or

draw a labelled diagram as shown.

Procedures:
Method of controlling the manipulated variable:

Diagram 1

Method of measuring the responding variable:

Repeat experiment

Diagram 2
Inference:
Hypothesis:

Aim:
Variables:
(a) manipulated variable :
__________________________
(b) responding variable :
__________________________
(c) fixed variable
:
___________________________
Apparatus and materials:

Table with columns of n and l

FIZIKMOZAC

Conclusion:..
Precaution:.
TUTORIAL 1.4

FIZIKMOZAC

1.

Table 1 shows the results of an experiment to investigate the relationship between load and extension
when a spring is stretched.

Load
F/N
Extensio
n
x/cm

100

150

200

250

300

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

The original length of the spring is lo = 15.0 cm what it the manipulated variable?(2008)
A.
Load, F
B.
Extension, x
C.
Original length of the spring
D.
Material used to make the spring
2.

Diagram 1 shows an investigation about the stretching of a spring. Babies of different masses are
supported by identical springs.

Which of the following variables are correct? (2009)

A
B
C
D
3.

Manipulated
variable
Mass of the
baby
Length of the
spring
Diameter of the
spring
Mass of the
baby

Responding
variable
Length of the
spring
Mass of the
baby
Length of the
spring
Diameter of the
spring

Constant
variable
Diameter of the
spring
Diameter of the
spring
Mass of the
baby
Length of the
spring

Diagram 1 shows an electric circuit used to investigate the relationship between the resistance and the
length of a wire.

Which of the following is correct?(2010)

A
B

Manipulated
variable
Potential
difference
Current

Responding
variable
Resistance

Constant
variable
Length of wire

Potential

Diameter of

FIZIKMOZAC

Length of wire

difference
Resistance

wire
Diameter of
wire
Length of wire

Resistance

Current

4.

Which of the following is the best graph ?

5.

Which of the following graphs show that y increases linearly with x?

6.

Which of the following graphs obeys the equation F = kx , where k is a constant? (2006)

7.

The acceleration, a of an object is inversely proportional to the mass, m of the object under constant
force.
Which of the following graphs describes the relationship between a and m .

FIZIKMOZAC

8.

Based on the graph above, what is the gradient of the graph?

A - 1.5
B - 0.7
C 0.7
D 1.0
E 1.5

9.

What is the unit of the gradient of the graph above?

A m
B
m2 s
C ms2
D
ms- 2

10. A student plot a graph for a physical quantity , Q on axis-y against a physical quantity ,R on axis x
The relationship between Q and R is given by as Q - aR = b , where a and b are constants. The gradient
of the graph is
A a
B
R
b
Q
C

Paper 3 section A SPM 2008

1. A students carries out an experiment to investigate the relationship between the length, l , of a simple
pendulum and the period of oscillation, T. The apparatus set-up for this experiment is shown in Diagram
5.1.

Diagram 5.1

FIZIKMOZAC

The student starts the experiment with a pendulum length of 30.0 cm. The pendulum bob is displaced
and then released so that it oscillates. The time taken, t, for 10 complete oscillations is recorded. The
experiment is repeated with pendulum lengths of 40.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 60.0 cm and 70.0 cm.
The corresponding stopwatch readings for 10 complete oscillations are shown in Diagram 1.2, 1.3, 1.4 ,
1.5 and 1.6.

Diagram 1.2

Diagram 5.2

Diagram 1.3

Diagram 1.4

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 1.5

Diagram 1.6
(a)
(i)

For the experiment described on pages6, 7and 8, identify:

Diagram
5.4
Diagram
5.5
Diagram
5.6
[3 marks]

The manipulated variable:

(ii) The responding variable: .

(iii) The constant variable:

(i)

(b) For this part of question, write your answers in the spaces provided in the corresponding Diagrams.
Your answers must be correct to two decimal places.
Based on
Diagrams
1.2, 1.3,
1.4,
1.5 and 1.6:
Record the
readings, t,
of the
stopwatch.
[2
marks]

(ii) For each value

5(b)(i),
calculate
period of
oscillation,
the
pendulum
the
following
equation:
t/10
Record the
of T.
mark]

of t in
the
T, of
using
T=
value
[1

FIZIKMOZAC

(iii) Calculate T2 for each value of T in 5(b)(ii). Record the value of T2.
(c) Tabulate your results for all values of l, T and T2 in the space below.

[2 marks]
[2 marks]

(a) Graph of T2 against l On the graph paper on page10, plot a graph of T2 against l.
(b) Based on your graph in 5(d), state the relationship between T2 and l.

[5 marks]
[1 mark]

FIZIKMOZAC

FIZIKMOZAC

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12

Analysing Linear Motion

Analysing Motion Graphs
Understanding Inertia
Analysing Momentum
Understanding the Effects of a force
Analysing Impulse and Impuslsive Force
Being Aware of the need for Safety Features in Vehicles
Understanding Gravity
Analysing Forces in Equilbrium
Understanding Work, Energy, Power and Efficiency
Appreciating the Importance of Maximising the Efficiency of Devices
Understanding Elasticity

FIZIKMOZAC

2.1
Displacement is
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
By the end of this subtopic, you will be able to:

Define distance, and displacement

Define speed and velocity

Define acceleration and deceleration

Calculate speed, and velocity

Calculate acceleration/ deceleration

Solve problem on linear motion with uniform

acceleration using equations.
Linear motion is a study of moving object in a
_______________ line.

How would you describe the motion of the runner

in words? We describe linear motion in terms of
distance, displacement, speed, velocity,
acceleration and deceleration.

Diagram below shows the difference between

distance and displacement.
___________ = Length of the
road
___________ = Length of the
line AB

Activity 2: Difference between distance &

displacement

Activity 1: (a) Distance & Displacement

1.

2.

In groups of four, carry out these activities.

Draw a diagram as below. Your task is to put
a pencil at point C.

With a pencil take a ride from position A to B

and to the final destination, C.

Your total

Every day Rahim walks from his house to the

junction which is 1.5 km from his house. Then he
turns back and stops at warung Pak Din which is
0.5 km from his house.
(a) What is Rahims displacement from his
house

when he reaches the junction. .

path of length = __________, this value is

known as _____________
3.

Repeat step 2 but now from A direct to the

final destination of C. This is your shortest
path to the final destination, C.
The value = _____________. This value is

When he is at warung Pak Din..

(b) After breakfast, Rahim walks back to his

house. When he reaches home,
(i) what is the total distance traveled by
Rahim?
(ii)

what is Rahims total displacement

from his house?

known as ____________
Define distance & displacement

Distance is

Activity 3
In a jungle tracking activity, a scout is given a
compass and a map. He starts his journey from
station A and is required to walk to station B
which is located 400 m to the east of station B.

FIZIKMOZAC

When he reached station B, he is ordered to go to

station C which is 400 m north from station B.

2.

The speedometer reading for a car traveling

north shows 80 km/hr. Another car traveling
at 80 km/hr towards south. Is the speed of
both cars same? Is the velocity of both cars
same?

(a) When the scout is at station C,

(i)
what is the distance he traveled from
station A?
(ii)

Define acceleration
Acceleration, a is defined as

What is the scouts displacement from

station A. State the magnitude and
direction of the scout from station A.

(b) Why does the answer in (i) and (ii) different?

Define speed & velocity

Activity 4: Acceleration
1. A bicyclist starts from rest and increases his
velocity at a constant rate until he reaches a
speed of 4.0 m/s in 5.0 s. What is his average
acceleration?
Strategy:
(a) state the initial velocity =

Speed is the rate of change of ________

(b) state the final velocity =

Speed = Distance traveled

Time taken

(c) state the time taken =

Quantity: _________ SI unit: m s-1

(d) apply formula

Velocity is the rate of change of ______

Velocity = Displacement
Time taken

2.

Observe the motion of a car in Diagram 1 (a)

and Diagram 1(b).

Quantity :_________ SI unit: m s-1

Activity 3: Average speed and average velocity

1. An aeroplane flys towards the north with a
velocity 300 km/hr in one hour. Then, the
plane moves to the east with the velocity 400
km / hr in one hour.

Diagram 2(a)

Diagram 2(b)
(i)

(ii)
(a) What is the average speed of the plane?

Describe the changes in velocity of a car

in Diagram 2(a). Is the car accelerate or
decelerate?

Describe the changes in velocity of a car

in Diagram 2(b). Is the car accelerate or
decelerate?

(b) What is the average velocity of the plane?

Exercise 1
1. You walk along a long straight school corridor
for 55 m, then you turn around and walk 30 m
in the opposite. Finally, you turn again and
walk 39 m in the original direction and stop.

FIZIKMOZAC

What is your displacement from your starting

point?

2.

A boy walks finish the following path AB.

It is connected to an _____ power supply of

50 Hz. When it is turned on, the iron strip will
vibrate 50 times per second.
The time taken to make 50 dots on the ticker
tape is 1 second. Hence, the time interval
between 2 consecutive dots is:
1/50 =
0.02 s.
1 tick is defined as __________________

_____________________________________
Activity 5:Method of calculationn

To investigate motion in
laboratory mean Ive to
determine distance /
displacement, speed/ velocity,
time and acceleration

Find:
(a)

total distance traveled

(b)

displacement

3. Fill in the blanks:

A steady speed of 10 m/s
_____ is traveled every ______

A distance of

A steady velocity of 10 m/s

A ________ of
10 m is traveled every _____ to the right.
-2

A steady acceleration of 4 ms
goes up by 4 m/s every ________

Speed

A steady deceleration of 4 ms-2

goes _______ by 4 m/s every ____

speed

STEP 1 :
Determination of time / time taken for 1 tick.
Time taken for 50 ticks = 1 second
Time taken for 1 tick = _______ s
Time taken from A to B = ____ ticks = ____ s

A steady velocity of -10 m/s

_____________________________________
______________________________________
Note:
KINEMATIC is the study of motion of objects but
does not consider the causes of motion . It came
from the Greek word kinema , meaning motion
the same root from which we get the word
cinema.
Relating Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration and
Time
Ticker timer:

STEP 2 : Determination of displacement

The displacement of the object is determined by
measuring the length of the ticker tape that is
pulled through the ticker time
Displacement from A to B = _________ cm

STEP 3 : Determination of velocity

Velocity, v = displacement
Time
= _____/ _________ cm/s
= ______ cm/s
STEP 4 : Determination of acceleration

FIZIKMOZAC

From the first strip:

Initial velocity, u at AB = __________
From the last strip:
Final velocity, v at DE = ___________
The time interval, for the change in the velocity, t
= _____________
Acceleration, a =

Making a speed-time graph

Ticker tape gain from the experiment:

3.

The diagram above shows a ticker tape chart

for a moving trolley. The frequency of the
ticker-timer used is 50 Hz. Each section has
10 dots-spacing.
(a) What is the time between two dots.
(b) What is the time for one strips.
(c) What is the initial velocity
(d) What is the final velocity.

Exersice 2
1. Based on the figure above, calculate the
acceleration .

(e) What is the time interval to change from

initial velocity to final velocity?
(f)

What is the acceleration of the object?

Activity 6 : To identify the types of motion

2.

The figure above shows a ticker tape

contains 5 ticks for every interval AB.BC.CD
and DE. Calculate the acceleration.

FIZIKMOZAC

Distance between the dots:

e.
Type of motion: ________________________
f.

Mark and cut the tape into 10-tick strips from

the start of the first clear dot
Paste the 10-tick strips side-by-side on a
paper to make a tape chart.
Find
The displacement of the 10-tick
The time covered for the 10-tick strip

Distance between the dot ___________

uniformly
the velocity of the object is ___________
uniformly
The object is moving at a uniform
____________.

Average velocity over the 10-tick

Strip

Change in velocity between the two 10-tick strip

Time taken for the change in velocity
Acceleration

Conclusion:
When an object with increasing velocity, it
experiences ______________
Paste your chart tape here.

Distance between the dots ____________

uniformly
The velocity of the object is ____________
uniformly
The object is experiencing uniform
_______________

Activity 6: To determine displacement, average

velocity and acceleration
Apparatus: Ticker timer, trolley, 12 V power
supply, runway, ticker tape, ruler
Procedure:
a. Raise one end of runway to a reasonable
height.
b. Pass the ticker tape through the ticker timer
and attach it to a trolley at the top of the
runway.
c. Switch on the ticker timer and release the
trolley.
d. When the trolley comes to a stop, cut the
tape.

FIZIKMOZAC

(a) What is the time for the boy to travel at a

distance 35 m?
(b) What it is his acceleration?

Solve problems on linear motion with uniform

acceleration
v = u + at

.(1)

s = ut + at

A car accelerates from rest at 3 ms-2 along a

straight road. How far has the car traveled
after 4 s?

4.

A car is traveling at 20 m/s along a straight

road. The driver puts the brakes on for 5 s. It
this causes a deceleration of 3 m s-2 , what is
the cars final velocity?

Where
s :
u :

s = u + v t .(2)
2
2

3.

v :
.(3)

a :

5. A car moving with constant velocity of

t :.-1
40 ms . The driver saw and obstacle in front
and he immediately stepped on the brake
2
2
v = u + 2a ..(4)
pedal and managed to stop the car in 8 s. The
distance of the obstacle from the car when
the driver spotted it was 180 m. How far is the
Exercise 3
obstacle from the car after it stops.
-1
1. A car accelerates from rest to 25 m s in 4 s.
Find the acceleration of the car.

2.

A boy is cycling down a hill. His initial

velocity is 4 m s-1. After he moves 35 m, his
velocity becomes 10.0 m s-1.

FIZIKMOZAC

B.
C.
6.

You can determine your reaction time by

catching a ruler between your fingers which
is released. Ready to catch the ruler by
opening your fingers at the zero mark of the
ruler. Catch the ruler as soon as it is
released. In this experiment, let say you
catch the ruler at mark 12 cm. The ruler falls
with acceleration 10 m s-2, calculate your
reaction time.

D.
5.

A tick from a ticker timer is

A. time interval between two consecutive
dots on a ticker tape.
B. distance between two consecutive dots
on a ticker tape.
C. frequency of vibration from the ticker
timer
D. velocity of vibration from the ticker timer.

6.

Which statement is true about the ticker tape

shown below?

A.
B.

Velocity between CD is low.

Velocity between DE and velocity
between AB are equal.
C. Frequency between BC is higher than DE
D. Time between AB is equal with the time
between DE
The diagram shows a ticker tape which is
pulled by a trolley through a ticker-timer of
frequency 50 Hz.

TUTORIAL 2.1 :LINEAR MOTION

1.

2.

3.

Which physical quantity is equal to

displacement? (2010)
Time
A. Speed
C. Distance
B. Velocity
D. Acceleration
The acceleration of a car moving with a
constant velocity will be
A. increased
B. constant
C. zero
D. decreased
Muthu cycles from his house to the shop.
While coming back, he stops at Ahmads
house.

7.

The average speed of the trolleys motion is

A. 0.2 ms-1
C. 0.3 ms-1
-1
B. 0.4 ms
D. 0.5 ms-1
8.

Average velocity from P to Q in the ticker

tape below is

A.
B.
What is his displacement from his house?
A. 300 m
B. 400 m
C. 1 100 m

4.

Which of the following is true regarding the

motion of an object having zero acceleration?
A. The object is not moving

The object is moving with uniform

velocity
The object is at rest or moves with
uniform velocity
The object is moving with maximum
velocity.

9.

85 cms-1
200 cms-1

C. 170 cms-1
D. 240 cms-1

Based on the ticker tape below, calculate

the acceleration.

A.
B.

2 ms-2
5 ms-2

C. 4 ms-2
D. 10 ms-2

10. Calculate the acceleration.

FIZIKMOZAC

B.

A.

- 50 ms-2

C. - 500 ms-2

B.

50 ms-2

D. 500 ms-2

11. The diagram below shows a tape chart

which is produced by a moving trolley. The
frequency of the ticker-tape timer is 50 Hz
and each stripe of ticker tape contains 5
ticks.

What is the trolleys acceleration? (1994)

A. 20 cm s-2
B. 200 cm s-2
C. 240 cm s-2
D. 400 cm s-2

28 cm

D. 30 cm

14. A lorry is moving with a velocity of 20 ms-1

brakes suddenly and stops after traveling
40 m. The time taken to stop is
A. 10 seconds
C. 8 seconds
B. 6 seconds
D. 4 seconds

15. Diagram below shows the path travelled by

a car from P to S.

What is the displacement of the car? (2007)

A. 5.0 km
B. 6.8 km
C. 8.2 km
D. 9.0 km
16. Diagram 2 shows Ali stands at O. He walks
towards A, then moves towards B and stops
at B.

12. Which of the following motion charts shows

a motion of uniform acceleration? Each
section of the ticker tape consists of 10
ticks.

What is the displacement of Ali? [2012]

A. 2 m towards west
B. 5 m towards east
C. 7 m towards east
PAPER 2, SECTION A
1. Question 1: Melaka Mid 08
Ali walks to the north for a distance of 300 m. He
then turns west and walks for another distance of
400 m to reach Pak Kassims stall.
Diagram 1 shows the path taken by Ali.

13. A trolley starts from rest and reaches a

velocity of 12 cms-1 after 5 seconds. The
distance traveled by the trolley is
A. 16 cm
C. 24 cm
Diagram 1

FIZIKMOZAC

(a)

Distance is a
Tick () the correct answer in the box
below
Scalar quantity

(iii)

state the type of motion of the trolley.

[1 mark]

Vector quuantity
(b) On Diagram 1, mark an arrow to show the
displacement made by Ali
[1 mark]
(c)

What is the total distance travelled by Ali?

2.2

...........................................................................
[1 mark]
(d)

Ali then walks home for another distance

of 500 m. What is the total displacement
made by Ali.
[1 mark]
.............................................................................
[1 mark]

2. SPM 2011 Question 2

Diagram 1.1 shows a trolley moving down an
inclined plane. The ticker timer vibrates at
frequency 50 Hz. Diagram 1.2 shows the ticker
tape produced by the motion of the trolley.

Diagram 1.1

Diagram 1.2
(a) Underline the correct answer in the bracket to
complete the sentence below.
The type of current used in the ticker timer is
(direct current, alternating current). [1 mark]
(b) Based on Diagram 1.2,
(i) one tick is represented by the time taken from
point .......... to point ..............
[ 1 mark]
(ii) compare the distance between PQ and ST.
[1 mark]

LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this subtopic, you will be able
to:
Plot and interpret displacement-time and
velocity-time graphs
Deduce from the shape of a displacementtime graph when a body is:
(i)At rest,
(ii)
Moving with uniform velocity
(iii)
Moving with non uniform velocity
Determine distance, displacement and
velocity from a displacement-time graph
Deduce from the shape of a velocity-time
graph when a body is:
(i)At rest
(ii)
Moving with uniform velocity
(iii)
Moving with uniform acceleration
Determine distance, displacement, velocity
and acceleration from a velocity-time graph
Solve problems on linear motion with uniform
acceleration.
From motion graphs, you will get information
about:
(i)
how far something has traveled
(distance, displacement)
(ii)
how fast it is moving (speed,
velocity)
(iii)
the speed changes with time
(acceleration / deceleration)
Activity 1: Plot and interpret displacement-time
graph

FIZIKMOZAC

Velocity = gradient = ______ m/s

Object moving with acceleration

Diagram on the left shows the motion of a car at

different time.
(a) Plot the graph.
(b) Calculate the gradient of the graph. What is
the unit of this gradient?

The rate of change of displacement is _________

The gradient of the curve increases showing that
the _________ is increasing
The object experience ____________
Exercise 1:
The following figure shows displacement time
graph of an object.

(c) What is the physical quantity showed by this

unit? ..
(d) Describe the motion of the car.

Displacement time graph: The gradient = velocity

Activity 2: Deduce from the shape of a
displacement-time graph
Object at rest

Object is at _____ because it is at the _______

position at any time.

Based on the graph

(a) calculate the velocity of the object between
(i)

AB

(ii) BC

(iii) CD

(b) describe the motion of the object between

(i)

AB : ___________________________

(ii)

BC : __________________________

(iii)

CD : ___________________________

(c) Find:
(i) total distance

(ii) total displacement

Velocity = gradient = ______ m/s

Object moving with constant speed
(d) Calculate:
(i) the average speed

Object traveling at _________ velocity because

displacement increases constantly in every
second.
The straight line of the graph has a constant
_________

(ii) the average velocity of the moving

particle.

FIZIKMOZAC

Activity 3: Plot and interpret velocity-time graph

The diagram shows the car moves from rest in a

straight line.
(a) Calculate the velocity when t = 1,2, 3, 4 and 5
s.
t/s
1
2
3
4
5
s/m
2
8
18
32
50
v/ ms-1

Object moving with constant speed

Gradient = acceleration = ______

Area under the graph = ______
Displacement traveled = ____ m
Object moves with constant ____________
Object moving with constant acceleration

Gradient = constant = ________

(b) Plot the graph.
(c) Calculate the gradient of the graph. What is
the unit of this gradient?

Acceleration = ________
Area under the graph = Displacement traveled
= ____m.
Object moves with constant _____________.

(d) What is the physical quantity showed by this

unit?

Object moves with constant deceleration

(e) Calculate the area under the graph. State the

unit.

(f)

What is the physical quantity showed by this

unit.
The gradient of the graph is __________ and
___________

Velocity time graph

The gradient = acceleration / deceleration

The area under the graph = displacement

Activity 4: Deduce from the shape of a velocitytime graph
Object at rest

The object is moving with uniform ________

Notes:
In linear motion analysis, if the velocity of
a particle is zero, it means that the
particle has stopped moving.
If the velocity of the particle becomes
negative, then the particle is moving
opposite to its earlier direction of motion.
Exercise 2: Determine distance, displacement,
velocity and acceleration

Gradient = acceleration = _____

Area under the graph = displacement = _______
Object is at _______.

FIZIKMOZAC

The following is the velocity-time graph of a car.

(ii) the average velocity

Based on the graph,

(a) Calculate the acceleration of the car between
(i) JK
(ii) KL
(iii) LM
(iv) MN

Exercise 3: Solve problems on linear motion with

uniform acceleration

(b) State the type of motion of the car between

(i)
JK : _____________________________
(ii)

KL : ____________________________

(iv)

LM : ____________________________

(v)

MN : ____________________________
(c)

Calculate the total displacement travelled of

the car during
(i) the first 10 s of motion

1. Calculate:(i) Velocity over OP, QR and RS

(ii) Displacement
Solution :

(ii) the car moves with uniform velocity

(iii) the last 10 s of motion

(d) Calculate
(i) the total distance for the whole journey

(ii) the total displacement for for the whole

journey

(e) Calculate
(i) the average speed

2. Calculate:(i) Acceleration at OA and BC

(ii) Total displacement
Solution :

Conclusion

FIZIKMOZAC

1.

Gradient of the graph s against t gives the

___________ of an object

2.

Gradient of the graph v against t gives the

___________ of an object

3.

Area under the graph v against t gives the

____________ traveled by the object.

4.
The conclusion of the motion graphs Graph

5.
6.

Which graph corresponds to a body moving

with constant velocity?
Which graph corresponds to a body moving
with constant acceleration?
The graph shows how the displacement, s of
an object changes with time, t.

Which velocity-time graph represents the

same motion as the object?

TUTORIAL 2.2
The following graphs show a displacement time
graph.

7.

1.
2.
3.

Which graph corresponds to a body at rest?

Which graph corresponds to a body moving
with a constant velocity?
Which graph corresponds to a body moving
with a constant acceleration?

The following graphs are velocitytime graph.

The following figure shows the velocity, v

against time, t

.
Which of the following graphs is its
corresponding acceleration, a against time ,
t graph?

FIZIKMOZAC

8.

The acceleration-time graph below shows the

movement of an object.
10. Based on the velocity time graph above
calculate the deceleration.

Which velocity-time graph represents the

movement of the object?

A
B
C
D

60 ms-2
30 ms-2
2.5 ms-2
1.25 ms-2

11. Based on the velocity time graph above,

what is the total displacement.,

9.

Diagram 2 shows the velocity-time graph of

an object.
A
B
C
D

0m
5m
10 m
20 m

12. Based on the graph velocity time above

,calculate the total distance travelled during

Which acceleration-time graph represents the

same motion as the object? (2008)

FIZIKMOZAC

the first 80 s of motion.

B.
C.
D.

24
32
64

15. Diagram 2 shows a car moving up a hill. The

car decelerates as it moves up the hill and
accelerates as it moves down the hill.

A
C

550 m
700 m

B 640 m
D 900 m

Which graph shows the correct relationship

between the velocity, v, of the car and the
time, t, of the motion? (2010)

13. Diagram below is a velocity-time graph

showing the motion of an object.

16. Diagram 8 shows a velocity-time graph for a

motion of a toy car.
Which of the following describes the motion
of the object? (2007)
OJ
JK
A
Uniform
Decreasing
acceleration
acceleration
B
Increasing
Decreasing
acceleration
acceleration
C
Increasing
Uniform
acceleration
acceleration
D
Uniform
Uniform
acceleration
deceleration
14.

Diagram 2 shows a velocity-time graph for a

motion of an object.

What is the displacement of the car in 6 s?

(2011)
A. 0 m
B. 30 m
C. 45 m
D. 75 m
17. Diagram 5 shows a velocity-time graph of a
bus with passengers on board. After 10
minutes, the driver steps on the brake pedal
to stop the bus.

What is the total distance, in m, travelled by

the object in 8 s? (2009)
A. 16

FIZIKMOZAC

What is the velocity of the passengers

immediately after the brake is applied? (2012)
A. 0 m/s
B. 2 m/s
C. 6 m/s
D. 72 m/s

(i)
PAPER 2, SECTION A
1. (a) Figure 4.1 shows a
Displacement - time graph of an object.

State the physical quantity which represents

the gradient of the graph.

Calculate the gradient of the graph.

(iii)

Calculate the total distance traveled

by the object.
2.

(i)

Diagram 5.1 shows a velocity-time graph

for a toy car.

State the physical quantity which

represents the gradient of the graph.

(ii)

Calculate the gradient of the graph,

m.

(b) Figure 4.2 shows a graph of velocity v against

time t.

Diagram 5.1
(a)

What is meant by velocity?

[1 mark]
On Diagram 3.1 mark with R a
region with zero acceleration.
[1 mark]
Based from Diagram 3.1 ,
Calculate
(i) The acceleration of the car.
[ 2 marks]
(ii)

Displacement made by the

toy car in 20 seconds.[2 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

.............................................................................
[1 mark]
(ii) from B to C
...............................................................................
[1 mark]
3.

Diagram 6 shows the distance-time graph

for the motion of a runner who is running
along a straight line.

Diagram 6

(a) Based on Diagram 6, what is the distance

travelled by the runner after 10 s?
...............................................................................
[1 mark]
(b) What physical quantity is given by the
gradient of the graph in Diagram 6?
................................................................................
[1 mark]
(c) Describe the motion of the runner,
(i)

from A to B

2.3
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this subtopic, you will be able to:

Explain what is inertia

Relate mass to inertia

Give examples of situations involving inertia

Suggest ways to reduce the negative effects

of inertia

FIZIKMOZAC

When we stood in a bus which starts suddenly from rest, we are likely to fall backward. If the moving bus
stop suddenly, we are likely to fall forward. The two situations show that our body has an inbuilt resistance
to any change in its state of rest or motion. This reluctance to change is called inertia.
Explain what inertia is
The inertia of an object is ____________________

An object in a state of rest tends to remain at _______.

An object in a state of motion tends to stay in ______.

Newtons first law:

___________________________________________
___________________________________________
Activity 1: Activities involving inertia
1. Place a cardboard on top of a glass and put a coin. Flick the card horizontally with your finger.

Explain what happens to the coin using the concept of inertia.

2.

Make a stack of 20 cent coins on a smooth surface. Flick another 20-cent coin toward the stack to knock

the bottom coin out without disturbing the rest.

Explain how the concept of inertia applies.

3.

Place a glass of water on piece of A4 paper.

What will happen to the glass of water if you suddenly pull the paper horizontally.
......................................................................................

FIZIKMOZAC

4.

Place a block of wood on top of a trolley. Let the trolley moves down the runway. Stop the motion of the
trolley with a book.

Observe what happens to the wooden block. How it the effect of inertia applied to the movement of the
trolley?
When the motion of the trolley is stopped by a block, the wooden block will continue its state of ___________
and slide __________. The ________ of the wooden block tends to keep its state of ___________

5.

A book is pulled out from its central location.

The books on top will fall _________________.

____________ of the block tries to remain at __________. So when the book is pulled out, the books on top
do not follow suit.
Activity 2: Relate mass to inertia

1(a) Which one is easier to move, a lighter trolley (diagram a) or a heavier trolley (diagram b)?
______________
(b) Which trolley has greater inertia? __________
2.

(a) Hang two cans to a ceiling.

(b)Push each can. Which can is easier to move?

FIZIKMOZAC

..
(c) Let the two cans swing.
(i)
Which can is easier to stop?......................
(ii)
Which can has lower inertia?....................
(iii)
State the relationship between inertia and mass.
.
(iv)

What is the physics quantity which describe inertia?

Exercise 1:
1. Passengers in a bus will lurch backwards when a stationary bus starts to move with forward
acceleration. Why?

When the bus moves suddenly from rest, our feet are carried __________ but the _________ of our body
tends to keep us at _______. This causes our body to fall _____________.
2.

Passengers in a moving bus lurch forward when the bus comes to a halt suddenly. Why?

The passengers were in a state of _________ when the bus was moving. When the bus stops suddenly, our
feet are brought to _______, but the ___________ of our body tends to continue its __________ motion. This
causes our body to fall ___________
3.

4.

5.

Chili sauce in the bottle can be easily poured out if the bottle is moved down fast with a sudden stop.
Explain
The sauce in the bottles ________ with the bottle during the downward movement.
When the bottle is __________, the __________ of the sauce causes it to __________ in its downward
movement and thus the sauce is _____________ out of the bottle.

The head of hammer is secured tightly to its handle by ___________ one end of the handle, held
vertically, on a hard surface.
This causes the hammer head to continue on its __________ motion when the handle has been
__________, so that the top end of the handle is slotted deeper into the hammer head.
A boy runs away from a cow in a zig zag motion. Why?

FIZIKMOZAC

6.

The drop of water on a wet umbrella will fall when the boy rotates the umbrella.

This is because the drop of water on the surface of the umbrella ________ simultaneously as the
umbrella is rotated.
When the umbrella stops rotating, the _________ of the drop of water will continue to maintain its
motion.

7.

The massive oil tanker takes a long time to accelerate to its full speed and a few kilometers to come to a
stop even though the engine has reversed its propeller to slow it down. Why?

Suggest ways to reduce the negative effects of inertia

1. Safety in a car:
(a) Safety belt secures the driver to their seats. When the car stops suddenly, the seat belt provides the
external force that prevents the driver from being thrown _________.

(b) Headrest prevents injuries to the _______ during rear-end collisions. The inertia of the head tends to
keep in its state of _______ when the body is moved suddenly.

(c) An air bag is fitted inside the steering wheel. It provides a cushion to prevent the driver from
_________ the steering wheel or dashboard during a collision.

FIZIKMOZAC

2.

Furniture carried by a lorry normally is ______ up together by string. When the lorry starts to move
suddenly, the furniture is more difficult to fall off due to their inertia because their combined mass has
increased.

3.

The oil tank of an oil tanker lorry is usually divided into a few smaller compartments so that the effects of
_________ can be greatly reduced. The movement of the oil in a large tank can make the lorry very
unstable due to ________ inertia.

Experiment 2.2: Inertia and Mass

Aim: To study the ___________________________
Apparatus: Hacksaw blade, G-clamp, stopwatch and plasticine.
Manipulated variables: ___________________
Responding variables: ___________________
Fixed variable: __________________________

Procedure:
1.Place a lump of plasticine with a mass of 30 g at the free end of the hacksaw blade.
2.Displace the hacksaw blade slightly and release it so that it oscillates horizontally.
3.Determine and record the time taken for 10 complete oscillations, t.
4.Calculate period of oscillations, T = t/10 and frequency, f =1/T
5.Repeat the experiment with mass of 40 g, 50 g, 60 g and 70 g.
Mass / g
t1

Time for 10 oscillation, t

t2

T/s
tmin

f / Hz

FIZIKMOZAC

Discussion:
1. State the quantity used to represent inertia in this activity.

2.What is the relationship between the period of oscillation of an object and inertia?

3.From the graph, state the relationship between

Period of oscillation and mass of object.
.
Inertia of an object and its mass.
.
TUTORIAL 2.3
1.
A.
B.
C.

Which of the following statements is true?

Inertia is the gravity pull on the mass.
Inertia is the acceleration of body which
moves linearly
Inertia is a property of a body that resists a
change in the state of rest or motion of the
body.

2.

A student did an experiment as shown with

sand. Which of the following showed the
correct observation?

A.

It was difficult to start Q moving but easy to

stop it moving.
It was easy to start P moving but difficult to
stop P moving
It was difficult to start Q moving and to stop it
moving.
It was difficult to start P moving and to stop it
moving.

B.
C.
D.
3.

A.
B.
C.
4.

A body stays stationary, or continue to move

with a uniform velocity, unless there is an
external force that changes its state of
motion. Which law is explained by the above
statement? (2009)
Newtons first law of motion
Newtons second law of motion
Newtons third law of motion
The diagram below shows a boy standing at a
moving merry-go-round.

FIZIKMOZAC

What should he do to leave the merry-go-round in

order not to fall down?
When he lands on the ground,
A. he should bend his legs.
B. he should keep moving a few steps
forwards.
C. he should keep moving a few step
backward.
D. he should quickly stop moving.
5.
A.
B.
C.
D.
6.

7.

Inertia balance is used to compare the

masses of two different objects by comparing
the amplitude of oscillation of the inertia
balance
the period of oscillation of the inertia balance
the degree of damping on the inertia balance
the depression on the inertia balance.
Which vehicle has the largest inertia?

The diagram shows a pillion rider moving

backwards when the motorcycle accelerates.

FIZIKMOZAC

8.
9. The backwards movement of the
pillion rider can be explained by (2005)
A. the concept of inertia
B. the concept of equilibrium of forces
C. principle of conservation of momentum
D. principle of conservation of energy.

8.

Diagram shows the position of a plate before

and after the table cloth is snatched away.

Diagram
The plate remains stationary due to (2009)
A. inertia
B. impulse
C. momentum
D. linear motion
9.

Which phenomenon shows the effect of

inertia? (2012)

2.4

FIZIKMOZAC

LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this subtopic, you will be able:

Define the momentum of an object

Define momentum as the product of mass

(m) and velocity (v)

State the principle of conservation of

momentum

Describe applications of the principle of

conservation of momentum

Solve problems involving linear momentum

Define the momentum of an object

A softball player must wear a glove to catch a hard and fast moving softball. A slow moving softball is much
easier to catch. So a fast moving softball has a greater momentum than a slow moving softball.
A big cargo tanker is difficult to stop than a car moving with same speed.
The tanker has a greater momentum than a car.
Activity 1
1. To compare the effect of stopping 2 objects of the same mass moving at different speeds.

(a) Which golf ball hit the plasticine at a higher speed? _______________________________
(b) Compare the depths of the cavities made on the surface of plasticine by the falling golf ball.

(c) Which golf ball has a bigger effect of stopping? __________________________

2.

To compare the effect of stopping 2 objects of different masses moving at the same speed.

FIZIKMOZAC

(a) Which ball has a greater mass? ____________

(b) Which ball falls and makes a deeper cavity on the surface of plasticine? _________________
(c) Which golf ball has a bigger effect of stopping? _____________________________
Conclusion
Any moving object has momentum
A moving object has mass and velocity.

The effect of stopping objects in motion depends on two factors :

the ________ of the object
the ________ of the object.

The bigger effect of stopping objects meant it has a ___________ momentum.

The amount of momentum depends on its ______ and _________

.
Define momentum
Momentum = _____________________
SI unit: kg ms-1. @ N s (Newton second)
Momentum is a ________ quantity. The direction of
momentum follows the direction of the
___________.
Example 1
In a football game a player of mass
70 kg is moving with velocity of 4 ms -1 and the other player
of mass 75 kg is moving with 3 ms-1 towards each other as shown. Calculate the momentum of both players.

Example 2
Granny (m = 80 kg) whizzes around the rink with a velocity of 6 ms-1, She suddenly collide with Brad Pitt (m =
40 kg) who is at rest directly in her path. Calculate the momentum of granny and Brad Pitt.

State the principle of conservation of momentum

Activity 2:

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram shows two brothers are skating. The elder brother moves and collides with his younger brother
who is at rest. What is their movement after the collision?
The speed of the elder brother ________________
The speed of the younger brother _____________
Momentum of the elder brother _______________
Momentum of the younger brother _____________
Activity 3:

Flick a 20-cent coin, A, directly to another 20-cent coin, B.

(a) What happens to the motion of both coins after collision?
Coin A: _______________________________
Coin B: _______________________________
(b) What happens to the momentum of coin A after collision?

(c)
Is the total momentum before equal with the total momentum after collision? _________
Activity 4

Flick a 20-cent coin A, directly to 20-cent coins

B and C.
(a)
Describe the motion of all coins after collision.
Coin A: ________________________
Coin B: ________________________
Coin C: ________________________
(b)

What happens to the momentum of coin A after collision?

Activity 5

Diagram show a steel ball, A is pulled and released.

(a) The ball will __________ with the other four balls. This will cause the last ball, E to move to the
__________ and rise to the _______ height as ball A.
(b) Is the momentum conserved? ________

FIZIKMOZAC

(c)

What will happen if two balls A and B are pulled and then released?

Elastic Collision

Both objects move _________ at their respective velocities after the collision.
____________ is conserved.

__________ energy is conserved.

_________ energy is conserved.

Write equation:

Inelastic Collision

The two objects combine and move together with a common ___________ after the collision.

___________ is conserved.

__________ energy is not conserved.

__________ e nergy is conserved

Write equation

Explosion

FIZIKMOZAC

Before explosion both object stick together and at rest. After collision, both object move at ___________
direction.
Total Momentum before collision Is ________
From the law of conservation of momentum:
Total Momentum = Total Momentum
Before collision
after collision
Derive equation for explosion:

Activity 7: Applications
1. When a rifle is fired, the bullet of mass m, moves with a high velocity, v. This creates a momentum in the
__________ direction.

From the principle of conservation of momentum, an _______ but __________ momentum is produced to
recoil the riffle backward.

2.Application in the jet engine:

A high-speed hot gases are ejected from the back with high _____________.
This produces an _______ and _________ momentum to propel the jet plane __________.
3.

The launching of rocket

Mixture of hydrogen and oxygen fuels burn explosively in the combustion chamber. Jets of hot gases
are expelled at very high _______ through the exhaust.

FIZIKMOZAC

These high speed hot gases produce a large amount of momentum ____________.
By conservation of momentum, an ________ but _________ momentum is produced and acted on the
rocket, propelling the rocket _________.

4.

In a swamp area, a fan boat is used.

5.

The fan produces a high speed movement of air _________. This produces a large __________
backward.
By conservation of momentum, an _______ but __________ momentum is produced and acted on the
boat. So the boat will move forward.
A squid propels by expelling water at high velocity. Water enters through a large opening and exits

through a small tube. The water is forced out at a high speed backward.
The magnitude of the momentum of water and squid are ______ but _________ direction.
This causes the squid to jet __________.
Exercise 1: Solve problems involving momentum
1. Car A of mass 1000 kg moving at 20 ms-1 collides with a car B of mass 1200 kg moving at 10 m s-1 in
same direction. If the car B is shunted forwards at 15 m s-1 by the impact, what is the velocity, v, of the car
A immediately after the crash?

2.

A 15 kg medicine ball is thrown at a velocity of 20 km/hr to a 60 kg person who is at rest on ice. The
person catches the ball and subsequently slides with the ball across the ice. Determine the velocity of
the person and the ball after the collision.

FIZIKMOZAC

3.

A truck of mass 1200 kg moving at 30 m/s collides with a car of mass 1000 kg which is traveling in the
opposite direction at 20 m/s. After the collision, the two vehicles move together. What is the velocity of
both vehicles immediately after collision?

4.

A man fires a pistol which has a mass of 1.5 kg. If the mass of the bullet is 10 g and it reaches a velocity
of 300 m/s after shooting, what is the recoil velocity of t he pistol?

5.

Imagine that you are hovering next to a space shuttle in earth orbit and your buddy of equal mass who is
moving at 4 km/hr (with respect to the ship) bumps into you. If she holds onto you, how fast do you
move (with respect to the ship?

6.

A large fish is in motion at 2 m/s when it encounters a smaller fish which is at rest. The large fish
swallows the smaller fish and continues in motion at a reduced speed. If the large fish has three times
the mass o f the smaller fish, then what is the speed of the large fish (and the smaller fish) after the
collision?

7.

Why does a golfer begin his swing high in the air?

FIZIKMOZAC

When swung high in the air, the golf club hits the ball with a __________ momentum.
A larger amount of momentum is transferred to the golf ball resulting in a higher _________ of the ball
causing it to travel further.

8.

Describe what the goal keeper did before actually kicking the ball.
The goal keeper takes a few steps backward and then _______ forward while kicking the ball.
The ball goes __________ when kicked while running compared to kicking without running.
This is because a running footballer has a __________ momentum and his momentum is ____________
to the ball.

TUTORIAL 2.4
1
The SI unit of the momentum of an object is
A. kg ms-2
B. kg s-1m-1
C. kg m s-1
D. kg m-1s
2

The diagram shows 2 trolleys of mass m

approaching each other with velocity 2v and v.

After collision, they stick together and move

together with velocity
A.

v
4

C. v
3

B.

v
2

D. 2v

Trolley A and trolley B are approaching each

other and collide.

FIZIKMOZAC

Which statement is true?

A. Elastic collision occurs
B. Total momentum is conserved
C. Total kinetic energy is conserved
D. Both objects will move with different velocity
after collision.
4

A bullet of mass 10 g strikes horizontally at a

target of mass 2 kg and is embedded into it. The
two objects then move together with velocity 4
ms-1. What is the velocity of the bullet just before
collision?
A. 404 ms-1
B. 804 ms-1
C. 1020 ms-1
D. 1440 ms-1

A bullet of mass 10 g is fired from a gun of mass

490 g. The bullet leaves the gun with a speed of
120 ms-1. Find the initial speed of recoil of the
gun.
A. 2.4 ms-1
B. 4.8 ms-1
-1
C. 6.4 ms
D. 7.4 ms-1

The diagram below shows a ticker tape produced

in a non-elastic collision between a trolley P
which is moving and a trolley Q which is
stationary.

The frequency of the ticker timer used is 50 Hz

and the mass of trolley P is 2.0 kg, calculate the
mass of trolley Q.
A. 0.5 kg
B. 1.5 kg
C. 2.0 kg
D. 2.5 kg
7

Diagram 4 shows two identical balls, P and Q,

moving towards each other with a velocity of v
and 2v respectively. The collision between the
two balls is an elastic collision.

Which statement is correct about the elastic

FIZIKMOZAC

collision? (2008)
A. The momentum of ball P before the collision
is equal to the momentum of ball Q before
collision
B. The total momentum before the collision is
equal to the total momentum after the
collision
C. The kinetic energy of ball P before the
collision is equal to the kinetic energy of ball
Q before the collision
D. The total kinetic energy before the collision
is not equal to the total kinetic energy after
the collision
8

The diagram shows two trolleys of the same

mass before and after collision.

Which of the following statements is correct

about momentum after collision?
Trolley A
Trolley B
A Increases
Increase
B Increases
Decreases
C Decreases
Increases
D No change
No change
9

P, Q, and R are three similar pendulums. P has a

velocity of u just before it collides with Q.

Predict what would happen after collision .

A. P and Q do not move while R moves with a
velocity of u.
B. P, Q and R move together with a velocity of 1 3
u.
C. P stops and both Q and R move with a velocity
of u.
D. P moves backwards with a velocity of u, Q and
R move together with a velocity of u .
10

The picture below shows firemen holding a hose

spraying out water.

FIZIKMOZAC

Several firemen are needed to hold the hose

A. to support the weight of the hose.
B. to increase the mass of water coming out
C to increase the speed of the water in the
forward direction.
D to reduce the large recoil effect
11

The diagram shows two student skating towards

P.

What will happen to the girl when the boy

releases her hand? (2005)
A. Stays stationary
B. Moves towards P
C. Moves towards Q

12

The diagram shows a velocity-time graph for the

motion of an object.

The momentum of the object is constant from

(2003)
A. 0 s to 3 s
C. 3 s to 6 s
B. 6 s to 8 s
D. 0 s to 8 s
13

Diagram below shows two trolleys, P and Q, on a

frictionless plane. Trolley P moves and collides
with the stationary trolley Q. (2008)

Which of the following statements is true? (2006)

FIZIKMOZAC

A.
B.
C.
D.

The collision is an elastic collision.

Both trolleys do not undergo changes in
momentum
The total momentum before and after
collision is the same
The total kinetic energy before and after
the collision is conserved.

14. Diagram 3 shows two identical blocks, R and S, placed on trolleys P and Q respectively.

A
B
C
D

What happens to the wooden blocks R and S when trolley P collides with the stationary trolley Q?
(2010)
R
S
Pushed to the right
Pushed to the right
Pushed to the right
Pushed to the left
Pushed to the left
Pushed to the left
Pushed to the left
Pushed to the right

15. In which situation can the principle of conservation of momentum be applied? (2010)

16. Diagram 3 shows identical coins P, Q and R, at rest on a horizontal surface.

A
B
C
D

What will happen when P collides with Q?

(2011)
P
Q
R
Moves
Stationary
Stationary
Stationary
Stationary
Moves
Moves
Moves
Stationary
Moves
Stationary
Moves

17. Diagram 3 shows two trolleys before and after collision.

FIZIKMOZAC

What is the velocity of both trolleys after collsion? (2012)

0.60 m/s
0.83 m/s
1.20 m/s
2.00 m/s

A.
B.
C.
D.

PAPER 2, SECTION A
1. Question 2 (SPM 2004)
Diagram 1 shows a man standing on a stationary boat. He then jumps out of the boat onto the jetty. The
boat moves away from the jetty as he jumps.

State the physics principle that is involved in the movement of the boat as the man jumps onto the jetty.
[1 mark]
_______________________________________

Explain why the boat moves away from the jetty when the man jumps.

[1 mark]

_______________________________________
c

The mass of the man is 50 kg and he jumps at a velocity of 2 ms-1. The mass of the boat is 20 kg.
Calculate the velocity of the boat as the man jumps.
[2 marks]

Name one application of the physics principle stated in (a) in an exploration of outer space.
_______________________________________
[1 m]

2. SPM 2012 (Question 5)

Diagram 5 shows the motion of a bowling ball and a bowling pin before and after the collision.

FIZIKMOZAC

Table 5 shows the momentum of the bowling ball and the bowling pin before and after the collision.
Momentum before
collision (kg ms-1)
Bowling
Bowling
Ball
Pin
2.5
0.0

Momentum after
collision (kg ms-1)
Bowling
Bowling
Ball
Pin
0.4
2.1

(a) What is the meaning of momentum?

[1 mark]
(b) Based on Diagram 5 and Table 5, determine the total momentum of the bowling ball and the bowling pin.
(i)

Before the collision

[1 mark]

(ii)

After the collision

[1 mark]

(c) Compare the answers in 5(b)(i) and 5(b)(ii).

[1 mark]

.
(d)(i) Based on the answers in 5(b) and 5(c),state a conclusion about the total momentum.

[1 mark]
(iii)

State one conditions needed in order to apply the physics principle stated in 5(d)(i).

[1 mark]
(d) The total kinetic energy of the bowling ball and the bowling pin after the collision decreases. What type
of collision is this?

[1 mark]

2.5
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
By the end of this subtopic, you will be able to:
Describe the effects of balanced forces acting on an
object.
Describe the effects of unbalanced forces acting on
an object
Determine the relationship between force, mass and
acceleration, F = ma

Solve problems using F = ma

FIZIKMOZAC

We use forces in our daily activities. Forces can make things move or slow things down
Activity 1:

Observer the pictures above. State the effect of forces for each sport event.
Activity 2:
Described the effect of balanced forces acting on an object
Balanced Force
When the forces acting on an object are balanced, the net force is ________.
Effect :
the object is at ______ [ velocity = ___ ] or
moves at constant _______ [ acceleration = ____ ]

The cup stays at rest. The net force acting on it is _______. Weight, W _______ Reaction, R

The plane moves with constant velocity

The net force acting on it is ____.

FIZIKMOZAC

Weight, W ____ Lift, U

Thrust, F ______ drag, G
Activity 3:
Described the effects of unbalanced forces acting on an object
When the forces acting on an object are not balanced, there must be a _____ force acting on it.
The net force is known as the __________ force or ___________ force.
The unbalanced force = net force
= force applied resistant force

Effect : Can cause a body to

..
..
..
..
..
..
Activity 4: Determine the relationship between force, mass and acceleration, F = ma
State Newtons Second Law of Motion

State relationship between a & F

State relationship between a and m

Complete the graph below:

Exercise 1: Solve problems using F = ma

1.

Calculate the acceleration of the block:

FIZIKMOZAC

2.

A man pushes a trolley with 5 kg box on a smooth surface. If he uses a force of 30 N to move the trolley,
what is the magnitude and direction of the acceleration of the trolley?

3. An object of mass 2 kg is pulled on the floor by a force of 5 N and having a constant velocity.
(a) What is the frictional force between the object and the floor.
(b) Calculate the acceleration of the object if the object is pulled by a 17 N force?
4. A bus of mass 2 000 kg travels with a uniform velocity 40 ms-1 for a distance 2500 m before it comes to
rest. Calculate
(a) the average deceleration of the bus
(b) the average force applied by the brakes to bring the bus to a standstill

5.

A wooden block of weight 50 N is raised by a rope from the ground through a pulley.
(a) If the tension of the rope is 80 N, find the acceleration of the wooden block as it is being raised.
(b) How much tension in the rope will produce an acceleration of 3 ms-2?

FIZIKMOZAC

6.

A car of mass 1200 kg towing a caravan of mass 800 kg and both have an acceleration of 1.5 ms -2.
Calculate
(a) The pulling force, F, of the car
(b) The tension, T, in the coupling between the car and the caravan.

TUTORIAL 2.5:
1

A constant force, F acts on a block placed on a

smooth surface.

The block will move with

A. uniform speed
B. uniform acceleration
C. gradually increasing acceleration
D. gradually decreasing acceleration.
3

A cyclist cycles his bicycle with a force of 120

N.

If the total mass of the bicycle and cyclist is 80

kg, the acceleration is
A 0.67 m s -2
B 0.80 m s -2
C 1.25 m s -2
D 1.50 m s -2
Which of the following systems will produce
maximum acceleration?

FIZIKMOZAC

The diagram shows forces P, Q, R and S acting

on an aeroplane flying at a constant
velocity and altitude.

Which of the following is correct about the

magnitude of P, Q, R and S ?
Horizontal
Vertical
A P=Q
R=S
B P>Q
R>S
C P<Q
R<S
D P>Q
R=S
6

The diagram shows an Formula-1 racing car.

Why does the cars design engineer use light

composite materials for making the
body of the car although its engine is
powerful ?
A Acceleration increases if mass decreases.
B A small mass produces a large force.
C A large force produces a large inertia.
D Composite material of small mass reduces
cost.
7

The diagram shows forces, F1 and F2, exerted

on a wooden block placed on a table surface.
The friction between the block and the table

FIZIKMOZAC

surface is 2 N.

Which pair of forces F1 and F2 causes the

wooden block to move with an acceleration?
(2005)
F1/ N
F2 / N
A
5
7
B
3
5
C
6
4
D
3
2
E
4
1

Diagram 4 shows a car with a mass of 1000 kg

moving with an acceleration of 2 ms-2. There
is a frictional force of 900 N acting on the car.

What is the force exerted by the engine of the

car? (2007)
900 N
1 100 N
2 000 N
2 900 N
1
0

F1 , F2 and F3 are forces with the same

magnitude acting on a wooden block. Which
diagram shows the maximum resultant force
acting on the wooden block? (2008)

11. Diagram 5 shows a toy car of mass 4 kg.

The car is pushed forward by a force of 10
N. The frictional force between the toy car
and the floor is 2 N.

FIZIKMOZAC

What is the acceleration of the toy car?

(2010)
A. 20 ms-2
B. 12 ms-2
C. 5 ms-2
D. 2 ms-2

PAPER 2 SECTION A
1.

Diagram 2 shows a car with a

mass of 1000 kg moving forward with a constant velocity. The engine thrust and Y are two forces acting
on the car in opposite directions. The magnitude of engine thrust at this moment is 2000 N.

Diagram 2
(a) (i) Name the force Y acted on the car.

[1 mark ]
(ii)

State the relationship between engine thrust and Y ?

.
[1 mark ]

(b) The engine thrust is increase to 3200 N

(i) Calculate the resultant force on
the car at this instant .
[1 mark]

(ii)

Calculate the acceleration of the car.

[2 mark]

FIZIKMOZAC

2.6
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this subtopic, you will be able to:

Explain an impulsive force is

Give examples of situations involving

impulsive forces

Define impulse as a change in momentum

Ft = mv mu

Define impulsive force as the rate of change

of momentum in a collision or explosion

Explain the effect of increasing or

decreasing time of impact on the magnitude
of the impulsive force.

Describe situations where an impulsive

force needs to be reduced and suggest
ways to reduce it.

Describe situations where an impulsive

force is beneficial

Solve problems involving impulsive force

Explain what an impulsive force is

Impulsive force is force that acts over a short period of time during collisions or explosions.
From the relationship between force, mass and acceleration:
F = ma = m (v u)
t
F = mv mu = change of momentum
t
t
m = mass t = time
u = initial velocity v = final velocity
Unit = N = kg ms-2
Impulsive force is the rate of change of momentum in a collision or explosion
Define impulse
Impulse is defined as the change of momentum;
= final momentum initial momentum = mv - mu
Unit : kgms-1 or Ns
From F = mv mu
t
Ft = mv mu = change of momentum = Impuls
Impuls is the product of the force and the time
Give examples of situations involving impulsive

FIZIKMOZAC

The effects of increasing and decreasing time of impact

From the expression F = Change of momentum ;
t
Impulsive force is ____________ proportional to time of contact /impact
Longer period of time Impulsive force ______
Shorter period of time Impulsive force _____
Activity 1:
Describe situations where an impulsive force
needs to be reduced and suggest ways to
reduce it
Situations
A high jumper lands
on the thick
mattress. Why?

Explanation

Goal
keepers will wear
gloves to catch a
ball. Why?
A high jumper will bend
his legs upon landing.
Why?

A baseball player
must catch the ball in
the direction of the
motion of the ball.
Why?

Items that are fragile, such as eggs, glass and

electrical appliances must be packed in
materials that are stiff but compressible. Why?

FIZIKMOZAC

Describe situations where an impulsive force is

beneficial
Situations

Explanation

A
karate expert can
break a thick
wooden slab with
his bare hand that
moves at a very
fast speed.
A massive
hammer head
moving at a fast
speed is brought
to rest upon
hitting the nail.

A football must
have enough air
pressure in it.

Pestle and mortar

are made of
stone.

Exercsise 1:
1. Rooney kicks a ball with a force of 1500 N. The time of contact of his boot with the ball is 0.01 s. What is
the impulse delivered to the ball? If the mass of the ball is 0.5 kg, what is the velocity of the ball?

FIZIKMOZAC

2.

In a tennis match, a player hits an on-coming ball with mass of 0.2 kg and velocity of 20 ms -1 The ball
rebounds with a velocity of 40 m s-1. The time taken in the collision between the ball and the tennis racket
is 0.01 s.
(a) What is the impulse experienced by the ball?
(b) What is the impulsive force exerted on the tennis ball?
(c) If the tennis ball has a velocity of 20 m s-1 is hit by the racket with a force of 50 N and the ball
rebounds with a velocity of 5 m s-1. What is the time of collision between the ball and the racket?

3. A 60 kg resident jumps from the first floor of a burning house. His velocity just before landing on the
ground is 6 ms-1.
(a) Calculate the impulse when his legs hit the ground.
(b) What is the impulsive force on the residents legs if he bends upon landing and takes 0.5 s to stop?
(c) What is the impulsive force on the residents legs if he does not bend and stops in 0.05 s?
(d) What is the advantage of bending his legs upon landing?

2.7

Component
Headrest

Function

FIZIKMOZAC

Air bag

Windscreen/
safety glass
Crumple zone

Front bumper

Anti lock
braking
system ABS
Side impact
bar

Seat belt

Dashboard

TUTORIAL 2.6:
1

A softball player moves his hand backwards

while catching a fast-moving ball.

This movement of the hand is to

A. increase the impulsive force
B. increase the stopping time of the ball
C. control the ball to stop it falling
2

Impulse is a vector quantity. It has unit N s.

Which of the following units also belongs to
impulse?
A. kg ms-2
B. kg ms-1
C. N s-1
D. N ms-1

An athlete performing the high jump. He lands

on a mattress. What is the function of the
mattress? (2005)

FIZIKMOZAC

A.
B.
C.
4

to reduce the collision time between the

athlete and the mattress.
To reduce the change of momentum of the
athlete when he hits the mattress.
To reduce the impulsive force acting on the
athlete when he hits the mattress.

Diagram below shows a parachutist landing

with his legs bent.

Why does the parachutist bend his legs?

(2006)
A. To lengthen the time of impact of his
feet with the ground.
B. To shorten the time impact of his feet
with the ground
C. To lengthen the time of falling to the
ground
5

Diagram 5 shows a box with a mass of 55 kg

being dropped from a helicopter. At the
moment before touching the ground, the
velocity of the box is 12 ms-1. The box stops 2
seconds after touching the ground.

What is the magnitude of the impulsive force

acted on the box? (2007)
A. 660 N
B. 330 N
C. 122 N
D. 110 N
Why are the front and rear sections of a car
designed to crumple easily? (2007)
A.. To increase impact time

FIZIKMOZAC

B. To decrease momentum
C. To increase friction
D. To decrease impulse
7.

Diagram 5.1 and 5.2 show two methods of catching a ball.

Diagram 5.1

Diagram 5.2

Which of the following explains the magnitude of the impulsive force on the hands when catching the
ball? (2009)
Diagram 5.1
Diagram 5.2
A
Small
Small
B
Small
Big
C
Big
Small
D
Big
Big

8.

Diagram 4 shows a car.

Diagram 4
The crumple zone is designed to (2010)
A. Reduce the momentum
B. Increase the impulsive force
C. Lengthen the collision time
D. Turn the kinetic energy into gravitational potential energy.
9.

A.

Diagram 2 shows an athlete bending his legs upon landing in a long jump event. (2011)

The athlete bent his legs to reduce the

Impulse on his feet

FIZIKMOZAC

B.
C.
D.

Impulsive force on his feet

Velocity just before landing
Time of impact between his feet and the sand.

PAPER 2 SECTION A1.

1. Question 2 (SPM 2009)
Diagram 16 shows an egg being dropped onto a wooden block. The egg cracks after an impact. The
velocity of the egg just before the impact is 5 ms-1.

Diagram 16
(a)

Name the force involved during the impact.

..........................................................
[1 m]

(b) Give one reason why the egg cracked after the impact.
..........................................................
[1 m]
(c) The mass of the egg is 0.05 kg. Calculate the momentum just before the impact.
[2 m]

FIZIKMOZAC

(d) Give one suggestion how you would avoid the egg from cracking when dropped from the same height.
..........................................................
[1 m]

2.8
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this subtopic, you will be able to

Explain acceleration due to gravity

State what a gravitational field is

Define gravitational field strength

Determine the value of acceleration due to

gravity

Define weight as the product of mass and

acceleration due to gravity

Solve problem involving g

Introduction
The concept of gravitational
Newton. He saw an apple fall
which causes them to fall to
This force which originates
the ground.

force was introduced by the famous scientist Sir Isaac

on his head. He said all objects are pulled by a force
the surface of the earth.
from the centre of the Earth pulls all objects towards

Gravitational Force
Objects fall because they are pulled towards the Earth by the force of ____________.
This force is known as the earths ___________ force.
The earths gravitational force tends to _______ everything towards its centre.
Activity 1 : Acceleration due Gravity
Figure 2 shows a
velocity versus time.
(a) Observe the

stroboscopic photograph of a falling ball and the graph

photograph and describe the positions of the ball.
___________________________________________

(b) What can we deduce

from the gradient of the v t graph?

___________________________________________

(c) Describe the motion

of the ball.

FIZIKMOZAC

Explain acceleration due to gravity, g

What is free fall?

An object is falling freely when it is falling under the ___________ force only.
A piece of paper does not fall freely because its fall is affected by ________ ___________
An object falls freely only in _________. The absence of air means there is no air resistance to _________ the
motion of the object.
In vacuum, both light and heavy objects fall freely. They fall with the _______ acceleration ie. the
acceleration due to gravity, g.
Activity 2
Hold two stones
both stone

with different sizes at the same height and then drop

simultaneously from the same height.

(a)

What happens to

both stones?

(b)

Describe how does

the velocity changes.

___________________________________________
(c)

Compare the time taken for the stones to reach the floor.
__________________________________________

(d)

Are the acceleration of the stones influenced by their masses?

___________________________________________

Aristotle thought that

dropped from a
earlier.
This hypothesis was
thought otherwise and
Italy.

when a heavier iron ball and a lighter iron ball are

certain height, the heavier iron ball will reach the ground

He found that the two

iron balls fell down at the same time.

Activity 3: Which one

reaches the ground first?

accepted for about two thousands years until Galileo

performed the experiment in the Leaning Tower of Pisa in

FIZIKMOZAC

Hold a golf ball and a piece of paper at the same height and drop them simultaneously
(a)

Which object reaches the floor first?

_____________________________________

(b)

Explain why.
_____________________________________
Repeat with a golf ball and a piece of paper which is crumpled?
(c) Which object reaches the floor first?
_____________________________________

(d)

Explain why
_____________________________________
Activity 4 :The difference between fall in atmosphere and free fall in a vacuum of a coin and a feather.
A coin and a feather are released from the same height simultaneously in the laboratory.

Coin
Observation: coins falls _______ than the feather
State and label two forces acted on the coin and feather.
Explanation:
The bigger _____ ____________ acted on the feather because it has a _______ surface area.
The ____________ force on the coin is able to overcome air resistance better than the feather.
The same coin and feather are
simultaneously from the same

put into a vacuum tube and then dropped

height

Observation: both objects

reach the bottom of the cylinder at the _______ time.

Explanation: In vacuum, there

objects is the force of
Both objects ______ ________
in their ______ and shapes

is no ____ ________. The only forces acted on both

____________
with acceleration due to gravity despite the differences

Define gravita-tional field strength

The gravitational field is the region around the earth in which an object experiences a _______ towards the
________ of the earth. This force is the gravitational _____________ between the object and the earth.

FIZIKMOZAC

The gravitational field strength is defined as the ____________ force which acts on a mass of 1 __________.

F
m

Its unit is _________.

Two meaning of g:
Two meaning of g:
1. An object falling freely near the earth/s surface will _________ at 10 m s-2.
2. Each kilogram of mass near the earths surface has a __________ force of 10 N acting on it.
_________________ field strength, g = 10 N kg-1
________________ due to gravity, g = 10 m s-2
The approximate value of g can therefore be written either as 10 m s-2 or as 10 N kg-1.
Activity 5: Acceleration due to gravity
Aim: _____________________________________
Apparatus: Ticker timer, 12 V ac power supply, stool, G-clamp, slotted weight, ticker tape.

Procedure:
1. Cut a piece of ticker tape about 2.5 m long and pass through the ticker timer which is clamped to a
stool using G-clamp.
2. Attach one end of the tape to the 100 g slotted weight.
3. Switch on the ticker timer and release the slotted weight so that it falls freely.
4. Analyze the tape to determine the value of the acceleration due to gravity, g.

FIZIKMOZAC

Discussion:
1. Why is it difficult to describe the motion of the falling objects by just observing them fall?
_______________________________________
2.

What is the type of motion of the objects as they fall under the pull of gravity?

3.

Why is it that the motion of the slotted weight can be assumed to be a free fall?

4.

What steps did you take to minimize the friction between the ticker tape and the ticker timer?

5.

Explain the need for the slotted weight to be dropped from a high position.

6.

Show how you calculate g from the tape.

7.

Compare the value of acceleration due to gravity from this activity with actual value. Give possible
reasons for any difference in these two values.

8.

Compare the values of g from the experiment if you repeat the experiment using 200 g and 300 g
weights.

9.

What can you say about the relationship between g and the mass of the falling object?

Define weight
Weight, W of an object is the gravitational force exerted on it by the Earth of other massive body.
Weight is a force and measured in Newton,N . Weight is a vector quantity.

A stone of mass, m released is free falls at a gravitational acceleration of g.

The only force acting on the stone is its weight, W which is downward.
Newtons second law of motion:

W
m

F = ma

unit: g = m s-2
where F = W , a = g

FIZIKMOZAC

Therefore:
W = mg
W = Weight
m = mass
g = acceleration due to gravity
Changing Weight , fixed mass
On the Moon, our weight would be ______ than on Earth, because the Moons gravitational field is
___________
Even on Earth, our weight can vary slightly from place to place, because the Earths gravitational field
strength varies.
Moving away from the Earth, our weight _________
If we could go deep into space, and be free of any gravitational pull, our weight would be __________
The value of the gravitational acceleration, g on
the Moon is 1/6 the value of g on the Earth.

Whether on the Earth, on the Moon, or deep in space, our mass

doesnt change.

Exercise 1
1. Find the weight of the object. Assume that g = 10 N/kg.

Mass
Weight

Deep in
space
100 kg

On Moons
surface
100 kg

On Earths
surface
100 kg

.
2.

Two rocks below are falling near the Earths surface.

10 kg

5 kg

Weight :

Weight :

Acceleration :

Acceleration:

Gravitational field
strength:

Gravitational field
strength:

3.

What is the weight of an object of mass 20 kg

(a) on the surface of the earth?

(b) On the surface of the moon?

4.

A spacecraft from Earth to Mars, where the gravitational field strength near the surface is 3.7 N/kg. The
spacecraft is carrying probe which has mass of 100 kg when measured on Earth.
(a) What is the probes weight on Earth?
(b) What is the probes mass in space?
(c) What is the probes mass on Mars?
(d) What is the probes weight on Mars?

FIZIKMOZAC

5.

Explain the following statements.

(a) The Earths gravitational acceleration is 10 m s-2.

(b) The Earths gravitational field strength is 10 N/kg

6.

Show that both earths gravitational acceleration and the Earths gravitational field strength have the
same units..

Difference Between Weight and Mass

Weight
Define
Change /
unchanged

Base or
derived
quantity
Vector of
scalar
quantity
SI unit

Mass

The weight of
an object
_________ with
the gravitational
field strength of
the location

The mass of an
object is
_________
everywhere.

A ________
quantity

A ___________
quantity

A ________
quantity

A ___________
quantity

For an object falling with acceleration g, the following equations apply:

1. v = u + at
where s = displacement
2. s = ut + at2
u = initial velocity
3. s = (u + v) t
v = final velocity
4. v2 = u2 + 2as
t = time
a = acceleration due to gravity, g
Notes:
1. When an object fall : a = g = 10 ms-2 (acceleration)
2. when an object is thrown upwards: a = -g = - 10 ms-2. (deceleration)
3. At the highest point, v = 0
4. downward direction, v is positive
5. upward direction, v is negative
Exercise 2
Assume g = 10 m s-2 and there is no air resistance
1. A rock falls from a height of 45 m.
(a) How long does it take to reach the ground?
(b) What is its velocity as it hits the ground?

FIZIKMOZAC

2.

Amir Naufal releases a stone into a well. If the distance between the top of the well and the water surface
is 20 m,
(a) what is the time required for the stone to reach the surface of the water?

(b) What is the velocity of the stone when it strikes the surface of the water?

3.

A ball is thrown upwards from the ground with a velocity of 30 m/s. After how many seconds will it
strike the ground again?

4.

he gravitational field strength on the surface of the Earth is 10 N/kg. If an object has a weight of
150 N on the surface of the Earth, what is its mass?

5.

An object of mass 5 kg is released from a tall building of height 500 m. What is the
(a) weight of the object
(b) gravitational field strength
time taken to reach the ground

6.

sketch the following graph for an object that is falling freely

FIZIKMOZAC

TUTORIAL 2.8: GRAVITY

1

The diagram shows a

coconut falling from the
tree.
Which of the following
accelerationtime graphs
represents the motion of the
coconut?

The diagram below shows the reading of a

weighing scale when the lift is at rest.

What will be the reading of the scale when

the lift experiences free fall?

FIZIKMOZAC

Two objects P and Q are dropped

simultaneously from two different height as
shown below.

Which velocity-time graph represents the

motion of P and Q?

FIZIKMOZAC

The diagram shows a coin, marble and dried

leaf being released at the same time in a
vacuum cylinder.

Which observation is correct?

A. All three objects float in the cylinder
B. All three objects reach the base at the
same time
C. The marble reaches the base earlier than
the coin
D. The coin and the marble reach the base
earlier than the dried leaf
5

The diagram shows a brick falling from a

table.

What physical quantity of the brick is

constant while it is falling? (2004)
A. Potential energy
B. Kinetic energy
C. Acceleration
D. Velocity
6

A ping-pong ball is dropped onto a concrete

floor. Which graph shows the relationship
between the velocity of the ball with time?
(2004)

The diagram below shows two metal

spheres, P and Q.

FIZIKMOZAC

Which of the following statements is true

when P and Q are in free fall? (2006)
A. The velocities of P and Q are the same
B. The accelerations of P and Q are the
same
C. The momentum of P and Q are the same
D. The gravitational forces acting on P and
on Q are the same
8

A brick falls from a height of 10 m. Calculate

the time taken for the brick to reach the
ground. (2007)
A. 0.5 s
B. 0.7 s
C. 1.0 s
D. 1.4 s

Diagram 3 shows two trolleys of different

masses.

What is the same physics quantity for both

trolleys? (2008)
A. Gravitational potential energy
B. Time taken to hit the floor
C. Kinetic energy
D. Momentum
10

Diagram 5 shows a stroboscopic

photograph of a ball dropped from a height.

Which physics quantity remains constant as

the ball falls? (2008)
Velocity
Momentum
Acceleration
Kinetic energy

FIZIKMOZAC

11

Diagram 4 shows a coconut falling from a tree.

Which graph shows the relationship between the gravitational force, F, acting on the coconut and the
mass, m, of the coconut? (2009)

12. Which statement is correct about the earth gravitational force? (2009)
A. Not all objects on the earth are influenced by the earth gravitational force.
B. The earth gravitational force is stronger when an object is further away from the centre of the
earth.
C. The acceleration of all falling objects is influenced by the earth gravitational force.
D. The earth gravitational force that acts towards the centre of the earth is uniform.
13. Diagram 7 shows a feather and a stone falling freely in a vacuum.

Diagram 7
Which statement is correct about the motion? (2010)
A. The feather and the stone fall with constant velocity.
B. The feather and the stone have the same kinetic energy
C. The feather and the stone reach the ground at the same time
D. The gravitational force acting on the feather and the stone are the same.

1.Question 6 (SPM 2003)

Figure 17 is a stroboscopic photograph shows two steel balls in a state of free-fall. Both balls are dropped
simultaneously from the same height..

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 17
(b) Observe the photograph and state two similarities between the position of the balls.
_______________________________________
______________________________________
[2 m]
(c) Name one physical quantity which causes the balls to fail.
_______________________________________
[1 m]
(d) Based on the positions of the free-falling balls, there is a physical quantity that is constant.
(i) Name the quantity.
[1 mark]
___________________________________
(ii) What is the value of the quantity and its unit?

[1 mark]

___________________________________
(iii) State how the mass of a ball affect the valued of the physical quantity stated in (c)(i).
[1 mark]
___________________________________
(e) A ball is thrown vertically upwards at a certain velocity.
(i) What happens to the motion of the ball as it moves upwards?

[1 mark]

___________________________________
(ii) Give one reasons for your answer.
___________________________________
[1 mark]
2. Question 5 (SPM 2004)
Figure 18.1 shows a feather and a water droplet falling from the same height. The mass of the feather and
water droplet is the same and both are dropped simultaneously at time t = 0.

FIZIKMOZAC

Figure 18.2
(a) Name one force acting on the feather and the water droplet.

[1 mark]

__________________________________
(b) Using Figure 18.1, compare the surface area of the feather and the water droplet.
[1 mark]
(c) Using Figure 18.1 and 18.2, compare the changes in velocity of the feather and the water droplet.
[3 marks]
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
(d) Using your answers in (b) and (c), state the relationship between the relationship between the
surface area and the final velocity.
[1 mark]
___________________________________

(e) The feather and the water droplet are dropped in a vacuum. Sketch a velocity-time graph to show
the motion on both objects.

[2 m]

FIZIKMOZAC

2.9
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this subtopic, you will be able to:

Describe situations where forces are in

equilibrium.

State what a resultant force is

Add two forces to determine the resultant

force

Resolve a force into the effective component

forces

Solve problems involving forces in

equilibrium

Describe situations where forces are in equilibrium

Forces in Equilibrium
1.

When forces act upon an object and it remains ___________ or moves at a constant _______, the object
is said to be in a state of equilibrium

2.

When equilibrium is reached, the _________ force acting on the object is zero, ie there is no net force
acting upon it.

Activity 1:
The diagrams below show situation when forces in equilibrium.
(a)
Show and label forces acting on the object.
What is the relationship between the forces acting on the object

In each diagram, make an inference whether forces acting on the objects in equilibrium

FIZIKMOZAC

Newtons Third Law of Motion: action and

reaction force have the same magnitude but
different direction.
Activity 2:
In each diagram, label and show the direction of action force and reaction force.

State what a resultant force is

Resultant force : a single force that represents the combined effect of two of more forces in magnitude and
direction.
The resultant force is the vector sum of two or more forces which act on the object.

Resultant force = _____ Resultant force = ______

Activity 3
1. Calculate the resultant force. Which direction does the object move?

2.

A horse pulls a cart with a force of 500 N. A farmer helped the horse by pushing the cart with 200 N
force. What is the resultant force?

FIZIKMOZAC

3.

A horse pulled a cart with 500 N force. A farmer pulled the same cart with 200 N force but in opposite
direction. What is the resultant force?

Two forces acting at an angle to each other

The resultant of two forces, which act on an object in two different directions, can be determined by the
triangle method and the parallelogram method of addition.
Two forces acting at a point at an angle [Parallelogram method]
scale: 1 cm =

STEP 1 : Using ruler and protractor, draw the two forces F1 and F2 from a point.

STEP 2
Complete the parallelogram

STEP 3
Draw the diagonal of the parallelogram. The diagonal represent the resultant force, F in magnitude and
direction.

Activity 4:

FIZIKMOZAC

1.
2.
3.

Set a scale. Using a ruler and protactor, draw the two forces, F1 and F2 from a point O.
Complete the parallelogram.
Draw the diagonal of the parallelogram . The diagonal represents the resultant force, F in magnitude and
direction.

triangle Method

1.
2.
3.
4.

Set a scale. Using a ruler and protractor, draw the first force, F1 from a point O.
Draw the second force, F2 from the head of F1.
Complete a triangle by drawing a line from the tail of F1 to the head of F2 .
The diagonal represents the resultant force, F in magnitude and direction.

FIZIKMOZAC

The figure shows an aerial view of two boats pulling a

ship. The forces exerted are F1 = 4 000 N and
F2 = 3 000 N and the angle between the cables is 50.
Determine the magnitude of the resultant force on the ship. In which direction will the ship move?

Mastery Questions
1. By using suitable scale and method, determine the resultant force.

2.

Complete the diagram to show the resultant force.

FIZIKMOZAC

3.

Total weight of the lift and passengers are 6 400 N. The tension of the lift cable is
the resultant force acting on the lift?

Resolve a force into the effective component

RESOLUTION OF FORCES:
A force F can be resolved into components
which are ____________ to each other:
(a) ____________ component , FX
(b) ____________ component, FY
FY = _________

sin = FY
F

FX = ________

cos = FX
F

Activity 5
1. Find the horizontal component and the vertical component of the force.

8 000 N. What is

FIZIKMOZAC

2.

The diagram shows a trolley of mass 2 kg on a smooth surface being pulled by a force of 6 N.
(a) What is the horizontal component of the force?
(b) What is the acceleration of the trolley?

3.

The diagram shows a car is being towed. The cable has a force F of 5 000 N.
(a) Indicate and label:
The force F
The horizontal force FX
The vertical force FY
(b) Find
(i) the horizontal force of the cable which moves the car forward.
(ii) The vertical force of the cable.

4.

A tourist pulled his bag with a force of 100 N with the angle 55 from horizontal.
(a) Indicate and label
The force F
The horizontal force FX
The vertical force FY
(b) Find
the horizontal force
The vertical force

FIZIKMOZAC

5.

A man pushes a lawnmower with a force of 100 N.

(a) Indicate and label:

The direction of force F exerted by the man on the handle of the lawnmower
The direction of the vertical component FY and the horizontal component FX .
(b) Find:
the horizontal and
the vertical components of the 100 N force.
(c) What is the function of each component?
(d) If the lawnmower weighs 300 N, what is the total downward force on the ground?

If the lawnmower is pulled rather than pushed, what is the total downward force on the ground?

Problem Involving Resultant Force and the Principle of Resolution of Forces

Lift
A girl is inside a lift. He is standing on a weighing machine. The weight of the girl, W acts downward on the
boy and a normal R, acts on the upwards direction.
Stationary Lift
The lift moves upwards with an
The lift moves downward with an
(Also moves upwards or downwards
acceleration of a ms-2
acceleration of a ms-2
with uniform velocity

Resultant Force, F = 0
F = R mg = 0
R = mg

Resultant Force, F is upwards

R > mg
F = ma
F = R mg

Resultant Force, F is downward

mg > R
F = ma
F = mg R

FIZIKMOZAC

The reading on the weighing scale =

the weight of the girl

= ma
R = mg + ma
The reading on the weighing
scale machine is larger

= ma
R = mg ma
The reading on the weighing
scale machine is smaller.

1.
(a)

A boy of mass 50 kg inside is inside a lift. Calculate the weight experienced by the boy @ the reading on
the weighing scale if the lift:
is stationary
(b) accelerates upwards with an acceleration of 2 ms-2
(c) accelerates downwards with an acceleration of2 ms-2
(d) moves upwards with constant velocity of 1.5 ms-1

Pulley

1. Find the
resultant
force, F
2. Find the
moving
mass,m
3. Find the
acceleration
,a
4. Find
string
tension, T

1.

A 2 kg trolley is connected by a rope to a 3 kg load. The rope passes over a smooth trolley. The
load is then released.
(a)(i) If the surface of the table is smooth, what is the acceleration of the trolley?
(ii) What is the tension in the rope?

(b)

(i) If the frictional force between the trolley and the surface of the table is 10 N, what is the
acceleration of the trolley?
(ii) is the tension in the rope the same as the value in a(ii)?

FIZIKMOZAC

Inclined Plane

2. A block of wood of m kg which is placed on an inclined plane which makes an angle with the horizontal.
The block of wood is acted upon by several forces:
(a) the weight component which is parallel to the inclined plane,
(b)

the weight component which is perpendicular to the inclined plane,

(c)

the normal reaction force, N

(d) the frictional force, f

3.

A box of mass m is on an inclined plane.

Shows all the forces acting on the box.
What is the weight component which is parallel to the inclined plane?
What is the weight component which is perpendicular to the inclined plane?

TUTORIAL 2.9:
1

The figure shows two forces acting at right angles to each

other.

Which of the following is the resultant force?

FIZIKMOZAC

The diagram shows a box being pulled by a boy.

What is the acceleration of the box? (2003)

A. 2.50 ms-2
B. 3.75 ms-2
C. 5.00 ms-2
D. 6.25 ms-2
3

When an object is in equilibrium of forces, the object.

(2007)
must be stationary
B. must move with a uniform velocity
C. is either stationary or moving with a uniform velocity
D. either moves with a uniform velocity or with a
uniform acceleration

Diagram shows a car on tow.

Which of the following vector diagram represents the

resultant force, F, which acts on the car? (2007)

FIZIKMOZAC

D.

6. The forces are in equilibrium in all the phenomena below except.(2008)

A. a car descending a hill at constant velocity
B. a lamp hanging at rest in a hall
C. a mango falling from a tree
a ship floating at rest in the sea
a ship floating at rest in the sea
7.

F1 , F2 and F3 are forces with the same magnitude acting on a wooden block. Which diagram shows the
maximum resultant force acting on the wooden block? (2008)

8.

Which diagram shows forces in equilibrium?

(2009)

FIZIKMOZAC

9.

Diagram 4 shows a boy pulling a block on a rough surface with force F.

Which diagram shows the actions of forces on the block? (2011)

10. Diagram 4 shows a woman pushing a trolley.

FIZIKMOZAC

The total downward force is .(2012)

A. FY + mg
B. FY + F
C. F - FX
D. F + mg
PAPER 2 SECTION A
1. SPM 1993
Two forces with magnitudes 3 N and 4 N act on an object Y as shown if Figure 18. The object Y is placed on
a smooth horizontal surface.

(a) By drawing a scaled parallelogram of forces to determine the resultant force on the object Y.
(b) If the mass of object Y is 2.0 kg, calculate its acceleration resulted from the resultant force.

(c) State the direction and magnitude of a force that has to be applied on the object Y so that the object
is in equilibrium.
__________________________________

2. Question 5: SPM 2008

Diagram 5.1 shows two boys pushing a large box. After some time, the box still remains stationary.

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 5.1
Diagram 5.2 shows an aircraft moving forward with a uniform velocity at a constant height.

Diagram 5.2
(i)

(a) Based on the situation in Diagram 5.1 and situation in Diagram 5.2,
state similarities about the magnitudes and directions of the forces F1and F2 , F3 and F4 .
[2 marks]
magnitudes : .....................................
directions : .................................

(ii)

What is the net force in both situations?

[1 mark]

(iii)

Based on the answers in 5(a)(i) and 5(a)(ii), name the physics concept involved.
[1 mark]

(b)

(i) Another aircraft has F3 greater than F4 Describe the motion of this aircraft.

[1 mark]

(ii)

Explain the answer in 5(b)(i).

..

[2 marks]

3. SPM 1996)
Figure shows a cyclist is riding along a road at a constant velocity. The total of downward force acting on the
bicycle and the cyclist is 650 N. The normal reaction of the front tyre is 300 N and forward thrust is 200 N.

(a)

Calculate the normal reaction ,P acting on the rear tyre .

FIZIKMOZAC

(b) Give one reason why the total resistance, Q should be 200 N at that moment?

(c) What will happen when the forward thrust is increased?

(d)

Why the cyclist thrown forward when the bicycle runs over a stone.?

(e) Explain why the cyclist can gets serious injuries if he falls into the road which the surface is very hard.

4. Question 6 (SPM 2005)

A student studies the effect of the movement of a lift on the readings of a weighing scale. The mass of the
student is 50 kg. In this study, the student stands on a weighing scale in a lift as show in the following figure.

He records the readings of the weighing scale when the lift is at rest, moving up with acceleration, moving up
with uniform velocity, moving down with uniform velocity and moving down with deceleration. The readings
of the weighing scale in the study are shown in the following table.
Movement of the lift
At rest
Moving up with acceleration
Moving up with uniform
velocity
Moving down with uniform
velocity
Moving down with
deceleration
(a)

Reading of the
weighing scale/
kg
50
60
50
50
60

The mass of the student is 50 kg.

What is the weight of the student in newtons?
. N
(b)

State two types of movement of the lift when the reading on the weighing scale is equal to the mass of
the student.
1..
2.

(c)

F is the resultant force that acts on the student.

R is the normal reaction of the weighing scale on the student
m is the mass of the student

FIZIKMOZAC

g is gravitational acceleration
Write a general equation to show the relationship between F, R, m and g.
..
(d)

When the lift moves up with acceleration , the normal reaction is greater than his weight. Explain
why ?

(e) (i) What is observed on the reading of the weighing scale when the lift moves down with an
acceleration?
..
(ii)Give a reason for your answer in (e)(i).
.

5. Question 4: SBP F4 08
Diagram 23 shows a truck pulling a car with a cable. The cable is at an angle of 60 0 to the horizontal.
The force, F, of the cable is 1500 N.

(a)

What is meant by force?

........................................................
........................................................
[1 mark]
(b) On Diagram 4, draw the horizontal component, Fx and the vertical component Fy for F.
In your drawing show the direction of Fx and Fy.
[2 marks]
(c) Calculate the magnitude of the horizontal component, Fx.

[2 marks]
(d) What is the effect of the component of forces, Fx and Fy to the towed car?
(i) Fx : ....................................................................
(ii) Fy : ....................................................................
[2 marks]

6.

Question 2: Pahan 2010

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 3 shows a box of mass 43 kg on a ramp with 20 slope to horizontal. Frictional force exerted
between the box with the ramp is 147 N.

(a) What is meant by frictional force?

......................................................................................
(b) (i) Calculate the weight of the
box, W.

(ii)

Calculate the resultant force, parallel to the ramp.

(c) Based on your answer in (b), explain what happens to the motion of the box?
......................................................................................

2.10

LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of this subtopic, you will be able to:

Define work (W) as the product of an applied

force (F) and displacement (s) of an object in
the direction of the applied force, W = Fs

State that when work is done, energy is

transferred from one object to another

Define kinetic energy

Define gravitational potential energy and

state that EP = mgh

State the principle of conservation of energy

Define power and state that P = W/t

Explain what efficiency of a device is

Solve problems involving work, energy,

power and efficiency.

FIZIKMOZAC

Work is done whenever a force makes something move. The greater the force and the greater the distance
moved, the more work is done.
Common characteristics:
Force is exerted on the object
Motion is the direction of the force

A woman
is pushing
the trolley

A
fisherman
is pulling
the boat

A farmer is
lifting up a
sack of rice

The
rockets
engine
produces
an upward
thrust.

Define Work

Work done is the product of an applied force and the displacement of an object in the direction of the applied
force
W = Fs

W = work, F = force
s = the displacement

The SI unit of work is the joule, J.

1 joule of work is done when a force of 1 N moves an object 1 m in the direction of the force

Calculation of Work
The displacement, s of the object is in the direction of the force, F

FIZIKMOZAC

W = Fs
Example 1
A boy pushing his bicycle with a force of 25 N through a distance of 3 m. Calculate the work done by the boy

W = Fs
Example 2
A girl is lifting up a 3 kg flower pot steadily to a height of 0.4 m. What is the work done by the girl?

The displacement , s of the object is not in the direction of the force, F

W = (F cos ) s
Example 3
A gardener pushes a lawn mower with a force of 50 N at an angle of 60 from horizontal. What is the work
done in pushing the lawn mower through a distance of 100 m?

Example 4
A workman is pushing up a load onto a lorry using a smooth inclined plane at an angle of 30 with the
ground. The height of the inclined plane from the ground is 1.5 m. How much work is being done by the
man?

FIZIKMOZAC

No work is done when:

The object is stationary

A student carrying his bag while waiting at the bus stop

The direction of motion of the object is perpendicular to that of the applied force.

A waiter is carrying a tray of food and walking

Exercise 1
1. How much work is done by the force F = 80 N?

2.

Ali pushes a big rock by applying a force of 200 N. How much work has he done?

3.

A man is pulling up a load using an inclined plane. The height of the inclined plane is 80 cm. How much
is being done the man to lift the load?

4.

How much work is done by Raju to lift the load through the displacement of 4 m?

FIZIKMOZAC

5.

A force of F = 25 N is used to lift a bag. Encik Rahim walks a distance of 20 m holding the bag. How much
work is being done by Encik Rahim? Explain your answer.

State that when work is done, energy is transferred from one object to another
Energy can be defined as the _________ to do work.
An object that can do work has ____________
Energy exists in many forms:
_________________________________
_________________________________
_________________________________
_________________________________
_________________________________
_________________________________
_________________________________

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)

Work is done because a force is applied and the object moves. This is accompanied by the transfer of
energy from one object to another.
Therefore, when work is done, energy is transferred from one object to another.

Define gravitational potential energy

A girl does work when she is climbing up the stairs of a sliding board. She has the gravitational potential
energy when she is at the top of the sliding board.

The gravitational potential energy is the energy

stored in the object because of its height above
the earths surface.
The gravitational potential energy is equal to the work done to raise an object to a particular height.
The force required to raise the object is the same as the weight of the object F = mg
If the distance moved by the object is h.
Work done, W = F x s

FIZIKMOZAC

= mg x h
= mgh
Gravitational potential Energy, EP = W

Ep = mgh
m = mass
h = height
g=acceleration due
to gravity

Example 5:
Calculate the gravitational potential energy in respect of each of the following.

Notes:
1. The gravitational potential energy of an object depends on the:
(a)
mass of the object, m
(b) gravitational field strength, g
(c)
change in height, h

The loss of potential energy does not depend on the gradient of the slope but on the vertical distance
traversed

FIZIKMOZAC

Define kinetic energy

A boy riding a bicycle posses kinetic energy. When he is riding faster, then he will have more kinetic energy.
At stationary , he does not have kinetic energy
Kinetic Energy is the
energy of an object due to
its motion

A force F is acting on a stationary trolley of mass, m moving on a smooth surface. The force acting over a
distance of s causes the trolley to achieve a velocity of v

Initial velocity, u = 0 Final velocity, v = v

Displacement, s = s
Work done, W = F x s
= (ma) s ..(1)
From the equation:
v2 = u2 + 2as
s = v2 u2 = v2 / 2a (2)
2a
Substitute eq. 2 into eq. 1:
Work done, W = mas
= ma (v2) = mv2
2a

Kinetic Energy EK

= mv2

m = Mass of the object

v = Velocity of the object
kinetic energy depends on:
(a)
mass of the object, m
(b) velocity of the object, v

FIZIKMOZAC

Example 6
Find the kinetic energy of the objects below.
1. A ball of mass 0.5 kg moves with velocity of 4 ms-1.

A car of mass 950 kg accelerates from a velocity of 20 ms-1 to a velocity of 35 ms-1. What is the work
done for the car to accelerate?

2.

State the principle of conserva-tion of energy

The principle of conservation of energy states
that energy can be transferred from one form to
another form, but it cannot be created or
destroyed.
The total of energy in a system is conserved.
Total energy before conversion
= Total energy after conversion

Activity 1

(h)

: 1(a) Hold a ball at certain height above the floor.

What is the energy gain by the ball?
Release the ball.
(i) What is the energy gain by the ball before it hits the floor?
.
(ii)

Where does the energy of the ball originate?

.

(iii)

What is the relationship between the energy in (a) with the energy in (b)?
.

2. (a) Push a trolley against a wall to compress a

spring. What is the energy store in the
spring?
..

FIZIKMOZAC

(b)

Release the trolley so it moves away from the

the spring?

wall. What happens to the energy stored in

Example 7
A coconut of mass 1.2 kg drops from a height. Ignoring air resistance.

(a)

(i) determine the distance the coconut falls in 3 s

(ii) determine the velocity then.

(b)(i) What is the loss of its potential energy after 3 s?

(ii) What is its kinetic energy then?

(c) What can be said about the loss of potential energy and the kinetic energy gained?
......................................................................................
Example 8
A durian falls from a height of 20 m. What is the velocity of the durian just before it hits the ground?
[Assume that g = 10 ms-2]

FIZIKMOZAC

Example 9
A ball is released at point A from a height 0.8 m using a smooth inclined plane. What is the velocity of the
ball at point B?

Define power
POWER is defined as the rate of work done or
the rate of energy transform?
P=W =E
P = power
t
t
W = Work
E = energy
t = time

Activity 2: Power
Aim: To measure the power generated by a person running up the stairs.
Apparatus: Stopwatch, half-metre rule, weighing scale
Procedure:
1. Choose one person from your group. Determine his/her mass.
2. Find a place in your school where the person chosen can run up the stairs from the ground
floor to the first floor
3. Measure the height of one step. Count the number of steps and calculate the vertical height from the
ground floor to the first floor.
4. The person chosen will first walk up and then run up the stairs as fast as possible. Record the time
taken.
5. Calculate the power generated during the task of running up the stairs.

Mass

Height
of one
step

Number of
steps

Time taken
to walk up
the stairs

Time taken
to run up
the stairs

Work done
to walk up

Work done
to run up

Vertical
height

FIZIKMOZAC

the stairs

the stairs

Power
generated
to walk up
the stairs

Power
generated
to run up
the stairs

Explain what efficiency of a device is

EFFICIENCY = output power x 100%
Input power

Example 10
A student of mass 45 kg takes 6 s to climb a flight of stairs that has 36 steps. If each steps is 12 cm high,
calculate the:
(a) work done by the student
(b) power of the student

Example 11
A motor lifting a weight having a mass of 1.2 kg. The motor lifts the weight up to a height of 1.0 m in 6 s.
What is the power of the motor?

Example 12
A petrol engine has a work output of 96 kJ per minute. What is power input if the engine efficiency is 20%?

Exercise 2

FIZIKMOZAC

1.

A trolley is released from rest at point X. What is the velocity of the trolley at point Y?

2.

A ball is moving along a smooth horizontal surface at a velocity of 6 ms-1. The ball then moves up a
smooth inclined plane . The height of the inclined plane is 1.5 m. What is its velocity at point B?

3.

A tennis ball is thrown upwards with an initial velocity 20 ms-1. What is the maximum height the ball can
achieved?

4.

State the energy at point

(a) P
(b) Q
(c) R
(d) S

5.

A boy of mass, m. about to run up the stairs. He takes a time, t to reach the top. What is the power of the
boy?

FIZIKMOZAC

6.

A car engine with an efficiency of 25% produces 3 000 N of mechanical energy per second. What is the
rate of heat discharge by the engine?

7.

A crane lifts a load 5 00 kg to a height of 120 m in 16 s. The power input is 45 000 W, what is the
efficiency of the motor used in the crane?

8.

A girl of mass 30 kg sitting on the top end of an inclined sliding board at a height of 2.5 m from the
ground.
When the girl slides down the inclined board, the work done to overcome friction is 510 J. What is the
velocity of the student before she touches the ground?

9.

Abu rides his bicycle down the slope of a hill 3 m high at an initial velocity of 2 m s -2, without pedaling.
At the foot of the hill, the velocity is 6 ms-1. Given that the mass of Abu with his bicycle is 75 kg, find:
(a)
the initial kinetic energy of the bicycle.
(b) The initial potential energy of the bicycle.
(c)
The work done against friction along the slope

1.

TUTORIAL 2.10:
Diagram below shows a weightlifter successfully lifting a load of 60 kg.

FIZIKMOZAC

Calculate the work done in lifting the load. (2006)

A. 30 J
B. 120 J
C. 600 J
D. 1 200 J
2.

Choose the figure which shows the man doing the maximum work.

3.

The diagram shows a motor lifting a load of mass 8.0 kg. The motor takes 4 s to lift the load to a height
of 0.5 m.

FIZIKMOZAC

What is the power of the motor?

A. 4 W
B. 16 W
C. 40 W
D. 160 W
4.

The diagram shows the path of a ball rolling down a smooth slope.

The ball has the greatest change in gravitational potential energy between the positions . (2004)
P and Q
Q and R
P and S
D R and T
5.

A student of 50 kg mass skates from point A to point B.

Calculate the kinetic energy of the student when he reaches point B.

A. 100 J
B. 175 J
C. 1000 J
D. 1750 J

6.

Which situation shows no work being done? (2008)

FIZIKMOZAC

7.

The diagram shows a student running up a staircase at a constant speed.

Which physical quantity increases while the student is running up the staircase? (2005)
A. Inertia of the student
B. Momentum of the student
C. Kinetic energy of the student
D. Potential energy of the student.

8. Diagram below shows a metal sphere oscillating on a frictionless track.

Which of the following statements is true? (2006)
A. The kinetic energy of the metal sphere is minimum at R
B. The potential energy of the metal sphere is maximum at P
C. The principle of conservation of energy is not obeyed
D. The total energy of the metal sphere at S is higher than at R
9.

Diagram 6 shows a wooden block and a weight connected by an inelastic string through a frictionless
pulley.

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 6
When the weight is released, the energy change that happens in the system is
A. Potential energy of the wooden block kinetic energy of the weight
B. Potential energy of the weight kinetic energy of the wooden block
C. Potential energy of the weight kinetic energy of the wooden block and weight.
D. Potential energy of the weight and wooden block kinetic energy of the wooden block
10. Diagram 5 shows a student with mass 70 kg climbing stirs at a height of 4 m in 40 s.

How much power is generated by the student? (2011)

A. 28 W
B. 35 W
C. 70 W
D. 700 W

11. Diagram 6 shows ball bearing P being released on a smooth plane.

What is its velocity at Q? (2011)

A. 2.4 m/s
B. 4.0 m/s
C. 7.8 m/s
D. 16.0 m/s
12. Diagram 7 shows a stone on top of a smooth slope.

FIZIKMOZAC

A.
B.
C.
D.

The stone slide down the slope and stops at point P. what is the work done by the stone? (2012)
14 J
18 J
140 J
180 J

PAPER 2 SECTION A
1.

(SPM 2000)
Figure 4 shows a high jump athlete of mass 60 kg jumping over the bar of height 5.0 m. I,J, K, L, M, N, O, P
and Q show the different stages of the jump made by the athlete. The height of the athlete from the level of
the bar is 0.2 m.

(a) Why is the athlete required to accelerate to a certain velocity at the stage of J to K before he begins to
jump?
..
.
(b) Explain why the pole has to be bend at L.
.
.
(c) Calculate gravitational potential energy of the athlete.

(d) What is the acceleration of the athlete at stage P?

(e) Why is a rubber mattress placed in the area where the athlete lands?
.
.

FIZIKMOZAC

2.
Question 4(SPM 2007 paper 2)
Diagram 27 shows a worker lifting a load of mass 20 kg using a pulley system. The worker applies a force of
220 N to pull the rope down a distance of 0.5 m. The load is raised to a height of 0.5 m.

(a) What is meant by work?

__________________________________

(b)
(i)

Calculate the work done

by the worker to pull the rope down a distance of 0.5 m.

(ii)

on the load to raise to a height of 0.5 m.

(c) (i) Compare the work done in 4(b)(i) and 4(b)(ii).

___________________________________
(ii) state why there is a difference between the work done in 4(b)(i) and 4(b)(ii).
_____________________________________
3.
spm 2006 Question 6
Diagram 6.1 and Diagram 6.2 show a student throwing an iron ball in a shot put event using different
throwing techniques. The angle of projection and the force used by the student in both techniques are the
same.

FIZIKMOZAC

(a) Observe Diagram 6.1 and Diagram 6.2.

(i)
Compare the distance of the hand movement to throw the iron ball

[1 mark]
(ii)

Based on the answer in (a)(i), compare the work done by the student between the two throwing
techniques.
..
[1 mark]

(iii)

If the force which acts on the iron ball Is 20 N and the distance of hand movement is 0.5 m,
calculate the work done by the student.
[2 marks]

(b)(i)

Based on the answer in (a)(i), state the relationship between the energy gained by the iron ball and the
distance of projection
..
[1 mark]

(ii)

State the principle involved

[1 mark]

(c)(i) Using Diagram 6.1, what happens to the falling time if an iron ball of a bigger mas is used?

[1 mark]
(ii)

Give one reson for your answer in (c)(i).

......................................................................................
[1 mark]

FIZIKMOZAC

4.
SPM 2010 Question 5
Diagram 5.1(a) shows a boy skating down a ramp from position X. Diagram 5.1(b) shows the velocity-time
graph of the boy from X to Z.

Diagram 5.2(a) shows the same boy skating down from position Y by using another ramp. Diagram 5.2(b)
shows the velocity-time graph of the boy from Y to Z.

Both ramps are of the same slope and surface.

(a) Name the physical quantity represented by the gradient of the velocity-time graph.
.
[1 mark]
(b) Observe Diagram 5.1(a) and Diagram 5.2(b).
(i)

Compare the gravitational potential energy of the boy at X and Y.

.
[1 mark]
(ii)

Compare the velocity of the boy at Z in these two situations

..
[1 mark]
(iii)

Compare the kinetic energy of the boy at Z in these two situations.

FIZIKMOZAC

[1 mark]

(c) Based on the answers in 8(b),

(i) State the relationship between the gravitational potential energy and the kinetic energy of the boy.

[1 mark]
(ii)

State the physics concept involved.

..
[1 mark]
(d) (i) Based on Diagram 5.1(a) , what happens to the velocity of the boy when he skates from Z to Q?
..
[1 mark]
(ii)

Gives one reason for the answer in (d)(i).

.
[1 mark]

2.11

LEARNING OUTCOMES:
By the end of this subtopic, you will be able to:

Define elasticity

State Hookes law

Define elastic potential energy and state that

E = kx2

Determine the factors that affect elasticity

Describe applications of elasticity

Solve problems involving elasticity.

Activity 1: Idea of elasticity

Aim: To observe elasticity in certain materials
Materials: Sponge, rubber band, plastic ruler, a bar of plasticine
Procedure:
1) Press the sponge with your finger. Observe the change in the shape of the sponge. Lift your finger.
Observe what happens to the sponge.
2) Stretch a piece of rubber band and let go slowly. Observe the changes in the length of the rubber band.
3) Bend a plastic ruler using both your hands.
4) Bend a bar of plasticine. Observe the change in shape. Place the bar on the table. Compare the shape of
the bar before and after it is bent.

FIZIKMOZAC

Discussion:
Classify the four objects above into elastic and inelastic objects.
Elastic
inelastic

Define Elasticity

No external force is
applied.
Molecules are at their
_________ separation.
Intermolecular force is
equal zero.
Compressing a solid
causes its molecules
to be displaced
_______ to each other.
____________
intermolecular force
acts to push the
molecules back to
their original
positions.

Stretching a wire
by an external
force:

Stretching a solid
causes its molecules
to be displaced
_________ from each
other.
_____________
intermolecular force
acts to pull back the
molecules to their
original positions.
Its molecules are
slightly
___________
away from one

FIZIKMOZAC

another.
Strong attractive
forces act
between the
molecules to
________ the
stretching
When the external
force is removed:
The attractive
intermolecular
forces bring the
molecules back to
their ___________
separation.
The wire
___________ to
its original
position

Activity 2: Relationship between force and extension of a spring

Aim: To investigate the relationship between force and extension of a spring
Apparatus: Steel spring, five 50 g slotted weights and holder, metre ruler, retort stand
Hypothesis: _______________________________

Manipulated variable: ________________________

Responding variable: ________________________
Fixed variable: ______________________________
Procedure
1. Mark the initial position of the pin on the metre rule when no weight is attached to the spring, lO
2. Attach a slotted weight of 50 g to the end of the spring and compare the new position of the pin with its
initial position.
3. Measure the extension of the spring, x = l l0
4. Repeat the experiment with mass 100 g, 150 g, 200 g and 250 g
Tabulate data for m,F, l and x
lO = ______________ cm
Mass / kg

F = mg /
N

l / cm

x = l - lO /
cm

Plot graph Force, F against extension of spring, x. Paste the graph on this page.

FIZIKMOZAC

Discussion:
1. From the graph, what is the relationship between force and the extension of the spring, x.
.
2.

Calculate the gradient of the graph. Show how you get the gradient from the graph.

3.

Care should be taken so that the spring is not stretched by excessive weights. Explain this.

.
State Hookes Law:
The extension of a spring is ____________ proportional to the applied force provided the __________ limit is
not exceeded.

F = kx
F= _________ on the spring
x = _____________________________
k = _________ _________ of the spring
Force extension graph

Based on the graph:

Relationship between F & x :
F is directly proportional to x
The gradient of the graph = _________ _______ of the spring, k
Area under the graph equal to the work done to extent the spring:
= _________ __________ energy = Fx = kx2
The elastic limit of a spring

he maximum _________ that can be applied to a spring such that the spring will be able to be _________ to
its original length when the force is removed.
If a force stretches a spring __________ its elastic limit, the spring cannot return to its original length even
though the force no longer acts on it.
The Hookes law is not obeyed anymore.

FIZIKMOZAC

Force constant of the spring, k

FIZIKMOZAC

The force required to produce one unit of

___________ of the spring.

F
x

-1

-1

unit N m or N cm or N mm

-1

k is a measurement of the stiffness of the spring

The spring with a ________ force constant is
harder to extend and is said to be more stiff.
A spring with a __________ force constant is
easier to extend and is said to be less stiff or
softer.
Arrangement of the spring
In series

The same load is applied to each spring.

Tension in each spring = ____
Extension of each spring = _____
Total extension = ______
If n springs are used:
The total extension = _____ n
parallel

The load is shared equally among the springs.

Tension in each spring = ______________
Extension of each spring = ____________
If n springs are used: The total extension = _____

Example 1
The original length of a spring is 5 cm. With a load of mass 20 g, the length of the spring is extended to 7 cm.
Determine
(a) the extension of the spring with a load 40 g
(b) the length of the spring with a load 60 g. the load required to extend the spring to 20 cm.

Example 2

FIZIKMOZAC

a.

The original length of a spring is 10.0 cm. When it is stretched by a force of 6 N, it extends
to 13.0 cm. What is the spring constant?

b.
(i)

(ii)

2 identical springs are connected in series as shown diagram (b).

What is the total length of the spring if stretched by 12.0 N force.

What is the spring constant?

c.

2 identical springs are connected in parallel as shown in diagram (c).

I.

What is the total length of the spring systems?

II.

What is the spring constant?

Example 3
Spring A extends by 2 cm when it hung with a 10 g weight. Spring B extends by 4 cm when it hung with a
10g weight. Find the total stretch in each of the spring systems shown in the following figure.

Example 4
The original length of a spring is 12 cm. With a load of 20 g , the length of the spring is extended to 15 cm.
What is the elastic potential energy stored in the spring?

Example 4
Figure shows a graph of force, F against extension, x for a spring. What is the potential energy stored when
the spring is extended by 0.4 m?

FIZIKMOZAC

Example 5
Figure shows a ball of mass 10 g pushed against one end of a spring on a smooth surface. The original
length of the spring is 14 cm and its spring constant is 200 N m-1.

Determine
(a) the elastic potential energy stored in the spring.
(b)

the maximum velocity reached by the ball after the compressive force on the spring is removed.

Exercise 1
A technician at a factory is given two springs, A and B. He must test the characteristic of the spring. Spring A
and spring B are made of same material and have same original length but have different diameter. The
technician extends each spring by using different force and measure the extension produced.
Graph below shows the graph force against extension of spring A and B.

(a) By calculating the gradient, determine the spring constant for

(i) Spring A
(ii) Spring B

FIZIKMOZAC

(b) Calculate the work done to extend 10.0 cm for

(i) Spring A

(ii) Spring B

(c) If each spring is extend by a 10 N force, what is the extension

(i) Spring A

(ii) Spring B

(d) Deduce either spring A or spring B which has a larger diameter.

.
(e) The technician needs a spring which can be extended with a smaller energy. Which spring is suitable?

TUTORIAL 2.11:ELASTICITY
1

The relationship between stretching force, F,

with the extension, x, of a spring, is given by
the equation:
F = kx
where k is the spring constant. What is the
unit of k? (2005)
A. N m-1
B. N m-2
C. kg m-1
D. kg m-2

2.

Which graph shows the correct relationship between the force, F, and the extension, x of a spring?
(2010)

3.

The diagram shows a load M supported by the arrangement of springs P, Q and R. All the springs are
identical.

FIZIKMOZAC

A.
B.
C.
D.

Which comparison is correct about the extension of P, Q and R? (2005)

P<Q<R
Q<R<P
R<Q<P
Q<P<R

4.

Diagram 11.1 shows the apparatus set up to study the elasticity of springs X and Y.

The relationship between length of springs X and Y when stretched by different force is shown in
Diagram 11.2

A.
B.
C.

Which comparison about spring X and Y is correct? (2011)

X is harder than Y
The original length of X is longer than Y
To stretch 1 cm, work done on X is smaller than on Y

5.

Diagram 13 shows three sprngs arrangements, P , Q and R. All spring used are identical.

FIZIKMOZAC

A.
B.
C.
D.

Which comparison of the length of spring arrangement, P, Q and R is correct when weight of 1 kg is
hung? (2011)
P>Q>R
P>R>Q
R>P>Q
R>Q>P

PAPER 2 SECTION A
1.
Question 3 (SPM 2004)
Diagram 31 shows the arrangement of an apparatus in an experiment to determine the relationship between
the extension e of a spring T with weight W. The relationship of e with W is shown in the graph in Diagram
31.1

Figure 31.1
(a)

State the relationship between e and W.

(ii) Name the scientific law involved in the relationship stated in (a)(ii).

(b)

Mark with a cross (x) the elastic limit of the spring on the graph.

(c) Based on the graph in figure 14.1, determine the force constant of a spring, k,.

(d) The spring stores energy when it is extended. Calculate the energy stored in the spring when it is
extended by 4 cm.

FIZIKMOZAC

(e) Another spring, identical to spring T, is added to the arrangement in Figure 2.1. This new arrangement is
shown in Figure 2.2. The experiment is then repeated.

Diagram 31.2
Sketch the graph of x against F for this experiment in Diagram 31.1.
PAPER 2: SECTION B & C: ESSAY QUESTIONS
1.

(a)

SPM 2003 Section B

Diagram 2(a) shows two identical plasticine spherical balls before being released from the same height.
Diagram (b) shows the state of the plasticine balls when the hit the wood and the sponge. It was observed
that the plasticine stopped more quickly when it hit the wood.

(i) What does the word momentum mean?

..................................................................................
(ii) Observe Figure(a) and Figure(b). Compare the shape of the plasticine balls, the surface of the wood, the
surface of the sponge before and when the plasticine balls hit the surfaces.
Relate the changes in shapes of the plasticine balls and the surfaces to deduce a relevant physics
concept.
......................................................................................
.....................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
..

FIZIKMOZAC

(b)

Explain the changes in energy that occur from the moment the plasticine ball is released until it reaches
the position in Diagram (b).

....................................................................................
...................................................................................
.................................................................................
(c)

An earth-monitoring satellite falls into the earths atmosphere at a high velocity and reaches a high
temperature. This is caused by the earths gravitational force and air resistance.
Using the appropriate physics concepts, suggest and explain suitable designs or ways to protect the
satellite and its equipment:
(i) from extreme heat,
(ii)from breaking up on landing
[10 m]

2.
(SPM 2008) Section B
Diagram 3.1 shows two identical steel balls placed onto spring M and spring N. Both springs are elastic and
fixed to a horizontal surface. The springs are pushed down until the lengths of spring M and spring N are the
same.
[Assume spring M and spring N are of the same material, same coil diameter and same original length]

(i)

What is the meaning of elasticity?

[1 mark]

......................................................................................
.....................................................................................
(ii)

Using Diagram 3.1 and Diagram 3.2, compare the thickness of the spring wire and the maximum
height reached by the balls.
Relate the thickness of the spring wire with the maximum height of the ball to make a deduction
regarding the relationship between the thickness of the spring wire and the elastic potential energy of
the spring.
[5 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

......................................................................................
.....................................................................................
....................................................................................
....................................................................................
....................................................................................

(b) The forces used to compress the springs in Diagram 3.1(a) and Diagram 3.1(b) are F1 and F2
respectively.
(i) Compare F1 and F2. Give one reason for this answer.

[2 marks]

......................................................................................
(ii)

Using Diagram 3.1 and Diagram 3.2, state the energy changes that take place from the moment
the spring is compressed until the ball reaches its maximum height.
[2 marks]

......................................................................................
.....................................................................................
(c) Diagram 3.3 shows a pole vaulter performing a jump.

(i)
(ii)
(iii)

Diagram 3.3
Using appropriate physics concepts, explain the use of suitable equipment and techniques to
improve his performance. Your answer should include the following aspects:
Vaulters attire
Vaulters movement
Pole used
(iv)
Safety
[10 m]

FIZIKMOZAC

3.

SPM 2011 Section B

Diagram 9.1 shows a stroboscopic photograph of a hammer hitting a nail into a wooden block. The
stroboscopic photograph is taken using a stroboscope and camera.

Diagram 9. 1
Diagram 9.2 shows another stroboscopic photograph of the same hammer hitting a similar nail into the same
wooden block with different force.

Diagram 9.2
(a) State the function of a stroboscope.[1 mark]
...................................................................................
..................................................................................
(b) Using Diagram 9.1 and Diagram 9.2,
(i) compare the distance between the two consecutive images and the depth of nail that penetrates into the
wooden block. [2 marks]
(ii) relate the distance between the two consecutive images with the velocity of the hammer.[ 1 mark]
(iii)
on the nail.
(iv)

relate the depth of nail that penetrates into the wooden block with the force exerted
[1 mark]
deduce a relationship between the velocity of the hammer and the force exerted on

the nail.
[ 1 mark]
......................................................................................
....................................................................................
...................................................................................
......................................................................................
(c) Diagram 9.3 shows a Taekwondo exponent smashing a wooden block using his hand.

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 9.3
Explain how the wooden block is smashed by the Taekwando exponent.

[4 marks]

.
.
.

(d) Diagram 9.4 shows an archer aiming an arrow to a target board.

Diagram 9.4
Using appropriate physics concept, explain the use of suitable equipments and techniques to improve his
performance.
Your answer should include the following aspects:
mass of the arrow
shape of the arrow
(iii) elasticity of the bowstring (iv) strength of the bow
(v) position of the aiming arrow compared to the centre of the target board.
[ 10 marks]

4. SPM 2007 Section C

Diagram 11.1 shows the speed limit and the load limit of heavy vehicles such as buses and lorries.

Diagram 11.1
(b) What is meant by speed? [1 m]
......................................................................................
(c) Using the concepts of momentum and inertia, explain why the speed limit and the load limit must be
imposed on heavy vehicles.
[4 m]

FIZIKMOZAC

......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
...................................................................................
......................................................................................
(d)
(i)

A tanker of mass 1 800 kg accelerates from rest to a velocity of 45 km/hr in 10 s.

Calculate the acceleration of the tanker

(ii) Calculate the force acting on the tanker.

[5 m]

(e) Diagram 11.2 shows four tankers P, Q, R and S, with different specifications. You are required to
determine the most suitable tanker to deliver oil safely. Study the specifications of all the four
tankers from the following aspects:
The type of brakes
The number of tyres
The number and size of the tanks
The distance between the trailer and the tractor.
Explain the suitability of the aspects. Justify your choice.

[10 m]

FIZIKMOZAC

5.
SPM 2010 Section C
Diagram 11.1 shows a boy of mass 40 kg sliding in two identical flumes, one after another.

Diagram 11.1 (a) shows the boy sliding down the flume, which is inclined at 30.0 to the horizontal.
Diagram 11.1(b) shows the boy stationary in the flume when the flume is inclined at 17.5 to the horizontal.
The frictional force acting on the boy in both flumes is 120 N.
(a) What is the meaning of frictional force?
[1 mark]
..................................................................................
(b) Based on Diagram 11.1(a), calculate:
(i)
The component of the weight parallel to the slope of the flume, W C.
[2 marks]

(ii)

The resultant force acting on the boy.

[1 mark]

(iii)

The acceleration of the boy.

[2 marks]

(c) Using the concept of force, explain why the boy slides down the flume when the angle of inclination is
30.0 and remains stationary when the angle of inclination is 17.5.

FIZIKMOZAC

[4 marks]
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
(d) Diagram 11.2 shows four lawnmowers, J, K, L and M with different specifications. You are required to
determine the most suitable lawnmower to cut grass effectively.
Lawnmower J

Lawnmower K

Lawnmower L

Lawnmower M

FIZIKMOZAC

(v)
(vi)

Study the specifications of the four lawnmowers based on the following aspects:
(iv)
Method of moving the lawnmower.
Mass of the lawnmower
Size of the cutter blade.
(vii)
The angle between the handle and the horizontal line.
Explain the suitability of each aspect and then determine the most suitable lawnmower.
marks]

[10

6. Question 11 Section C
Diagram 11.1 shows a golfer continues his swing after the golf ball has been hit. This action is called follow
through.

FIZIKMOZAC

The purpose of follow through is to increase the impulse acting on the ball.
(a) What is the meaning of impulse?
..
[1 mark]
(b) Explain how follow through can increase the impulse acting on the ball.

[4 marks]

..
.
.
.
(c) Diagram 11.2 on page 31, shows four flag poles, P, Q, R and S with different specifications mounted on
the ground.
Maximum
tension of string
= 1 000 N
Density of pole =
1 500 kg m-3
Flexibility of
pole = Low
Maximum
tension of string
= 2 000 N
Density of pole =
900 kg m-3
Flexibility of
pole = High

Maximum
tension of string
= 1 000 N
Density of pole =
900 kg m-3
Flexibility of
pole = High

FIZIKMOZAC

Maximum
tension of string
= 2 000 N
Density of pole =
1 500 kg m-3
Flexibility of
pole = Low

You are required to determine the most suitable characteristics of flag pole that can withstand strong wind.
Study the specifications of all the four flag poles from the following aspects:

The density of the pole

The flexibility of the pole

The maximum tension of the string

The height of strings tied to the pole

Explain the suitability of the aspects and determine the most suitable flag pole. Give reasons for your
choice.
[10 marks]

(d) Diagram 11.3 shows a man of mass 60 kg sliding down a water slide from point A to point B.

(i)

State the energy transformation that occurs from point A to point B.

[1 mark]
(ii)

Calculate the total energy of the man at point A.

[2 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

(iii)

By ignoring frictional force, calculate the speed of the man at point B.

[2 marks]

PAPER 3 SECTION A
Question 1 spm 2004
A student carries out an experiment to find out the relationship between mass, m, and the oscillation period,
T, of an inertia balance. A piece of jigsaw blade is clamped at one end and a plasticine ball with mass 10.0g is
fixed at the other end. The distance from the plasticine ball to the clamp is 20.0 cm. The arrangement of the
apparatus for the experiment is shown in Figure 1.1.

Figure 1.1
The jigsaw blade is displaced horizontally to one side and then released so that it oscillates. The time for
10 oscillations, t1, is taken using a stop watch. The jigsaw blade is oscillated again to obtain the time for
10 oscillations, t2, for the second time. The actual readings of t1 and t2 are shown in Figure 1.2.

FIZIKMOZAC

The experiment is repeated by using plasticine balls with masses 20.0g , 30.0 g, 40.0 g and 50.0 g. The
readings of the stop watch are shown in Figures 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6.
The period of oscillation, T, of the jigsaw blade is given by the following equation:

T=

tmean
10

where

t mean

t1 t2
2

FIZIKMOZAC

(a)
(i)
(ii)

For the experiment described above, identify:

the manipulated variable:

the responding variable: .

(iii)

a constant variable:
(b)

Based on Figures 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6, determine t1, t2, tmean, T and T2 for each value of m in the space
below.
[7 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

(c)
(d)

on a piece of graph paper, plot a graph T2 against m.

Use your graph to state the relationship between T and m.

[5 marks]
[1 mark]

FIZIKMOZAC

2.

Question 1 SPM
2005
A students carries out an experiment to study the
relationship between the speed, v, of a trolley with
the distance of compression, e, of a spring that
pushes the trolley down a track.
A piece of ticker tape is fixed to the trolley which is
placed on a friction compensated track. The trolley

is pushed back to compress the spring to a

distance of compression, e, equal to 2.0 cm, as
shown in Figure 1.1. The trolley is then released
and it moves down the track with speed v.

FIZIKMOZAC

Figure 1.1
A section of the ticker tape which
represents the movement of the trolley
when it reached the end of the track, is
taken. The actual size of the ticker tape is
shown in Figure 1.2. The above
procedure is repeated by varying the
values of e, to be 3.0 cm, 4.0 cm, 5.0 cm
and 6.0 cm. The actual sizes of the
sections of the ticker tapes are shown in
Figures 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6. The speed, v,
when the trolley reached the end of the
track can be calculated using the formula
below;

v=

x
cm s1
0.2

where x is length for 10 ticks as shown in

Figure 1.7. One tick is the time taken for
the trolley to move between two
consecutive dots.

FIZIKMOZAC

(ii) Calculate the values of v for every ticker

tape using the formula

v=

x
cm s1
0.2

Tabulate your results for x and v for every

value of e in the space below.

(a) For the experiment described, identify:

(i)

The manipulated variable

[1 mark]

(i)

The responding variable

[1 mark]

..
(ii)

The constant variable

[1 mark]

(b) Using the method shown in Figure 1.7 on

page 17, determine x, for every ticker tape
on Figures 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6.
(i) Measure x for every ticker tape on Figures
1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6. Write the values of
x on the spaces provided on page 18 and
19.

(c) On the graph paper of page 21, draw a graph

of v against e.
[5 marks]
(d) Use your graph in (c), to state the relationship
between v and e.
..
[1 mark]

FIZIKMOZAC

Question 2, SPM 2008

A student carries out an experiment to investigate

the relationship between the height, h, of the
raised end of an inclined plane and the

FIZIKMOZAC

acceleration, a, of a trolley as it moves freely

down the inclined plane. This experiment is
carried out using a ticker-timer and ticker-tape.
The results of this experiment are shown in the
graph of a against h.

a =

(d) State one precaution that should be taken to

improve the result of this experiment.

..
[1 mark]
Question 2 SPM 2007
A student carries out an experiment to
investigate the relationship between the mass,
m, of a load placed on a spring and the length, l,
of the spring. The student also determines the
spring constant, k. The results of this experiment
is shown in the graph of l against m in Diagram
2.1.

(a) Based on the graph:

(i) State the relationship between a and h.

[1 mark]
(ii) Determine the value of a when h = 0.30 m.
Show on the graph how you determine the
value of a.
a = .

[1 mark]

(iii) Calculate the gradient, m, of the graph. Show

on the graph how you determine m.
[3 marks]

(b) The gradient, m, of the graph is given by the

formula m = g/l, where g is the gravitational
acceleration and l is the length of the inclined
plane. In the experiment, l = 2.0 m. Calculate
the value of g.
[2 marks]
g =
(c) The student repeats the experiment using
another inclined plane of length, l = 1.5 m.
The raised end of the inclined plane is fixed at
height, h = 0.10 m. Using the formula
a = g/l x h and the value of g in 1(b), calculate
the acceleration, a, of the trolley.
[2 marks]

Based on the graph in Diagram 2.1

(i) What happens to l as m increases ?

[1 mark]
(ii) Determine the value of l when m = 0 g.
Show on the graph, how you determine
the value of l.
[2 marks]
l =

FIZIKMOZAC

(b)

The spring constant, k, is given by the

l
h , where h is the gradient of

formula k =
graph.
(i) Calculate the gradient, h, of the graph.
Show on the graph how you calculate h.
[ 3 marks]

= ..

(ii)

Determine the value of k.

1. Linear motion (SPM 2003)

Each diagram below shows two positions of a
student on a swing. The initial position in each
diagram is different.

Observe the positions of each of the swing in

each diagram and the appearance of the student
when she swings.

K = ..
[2 marks]
(c) Another identical spring is connected in
series to the end of the spring. The spring
constant, k, of the two spring in series is

given by the formula

1 1 1

k' k k .

Calculate k.

k =
[3 marks]
(d) State two precaution that can be taken to
improve the accuracy of the readings in
this experiment.
..

[2 marks]
PAPER 3: ESSAY
Based on the diagrams in Questions:
(a) make one suitable inference
(b) state one appropriate hypothesis that could be
investigated.
(c) describe how you would design an experiment to
test your hypothesis. In your explanation, state
clearly the following :
(i) aim of the experiment
(ii)
variables in the experiment
(iii)
list of apparatus and materials
(iv)
arrangement of the apparatus
(v)
the procedures of the experiment, which
includes the method of controlling the
manipulated variable and the method of
measuring the responding variable
(vi)
the way you would tabulate the data
(vii)
the way you would analyse the data
[12 marks]

2. Inertia spm 2006

Diagram 3.1 shows two wooden tops. One of the
tops is partly coated with tin. Both tops are the
same size and are rotated with the same velocity.
Diagram 3.2 shows the top which is partly coated
with tin is able to spin longer.

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 3.1
Diagram 3.2 shows the man pushing the same car
with the same force with no passenger in it. The
car moves with a bigger acceleration.

Diagram 3.2

3. F= ma (SPM 2010)
Diagram 3.1 shows a man pushing a broken-down
car with passengers in it. The car moves with a
small acceleration.

4. SPM 2009
Diagram 3.1 shows a worker carrying a gas tank.
Diagram 3.2 shows the same worker carrying two
gas tanks.

FIZIKMOZAC

that the speed of the bicycle increases at a slow

rate. Diagram 3.2 shows that when both Jason
and Jimmy are pedaling, the speed of the bicycle
increases at a higher rate.

Diagram 3.1

Diagram 3.2
Observe the length of the spring in the
suspension system of the motorcycle in both
situations.

5. F = ma
Diagram 3.1 shows Jason and Jimmy on a tendon
bicycle with Jimmy alone pedaling. They found

FIZIKMOZAC

LEARNING OUTCOMES:
3.1 UNDERSTANDING
PRESSURE
By the end of this subtopic, you
will be able to:

Define pressure and state

its formula

Describe the application of

pressure

Solve problems involving

pressure.

3.2 UNDERSTANDING
PRESSURE IN LIQUID
By the end of this subtopic, you
will be able to:

Relate depth to pressure in

a liquid

Relate density to pressure

in a liquid

Explain pressure in a liquid

and state its formula

Describe the applications of

pressure in liquids

3.4 APPLYING PASCALS

PRINCIPLE
By the end of this subtopic, you
will be able to:

State Pascals principle

Explain hydraulic systems

Describe applications of
Pascals principle

Solve problems involving

Pascals principle.

Solve problems involving

pressure in liquids.

3.5 APPLYING ARCHIMEDES

PRINCIPLE
By the end of this subtopic, you
will be able to:

Explain buoyant force,

Relate buoyant force to the

weight of liquid displaced

State Archimedes principle

Describe applications of
Archimedes principle

3.3 UNDERSTANDING GAS

PRESSURE AND
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE
By the end of this subtopic, you
will be able to:

Explain gas pressure

Explain atmospheric
pressure

Describe the applications of

atmospheric pressure

Solve problems involving

Archimedes principle

Solve problems involving

atmospheric pressure and
gas pressure

3.6 UNDERSTANDING
BERNOULLIS PRINCIPLE
By the end of this subtopic, you
will be able to:

State Bernoullis principle

Explain that a resultant

force exists due to a
difference in fluid pressure

Describe the applications of

Bernoullis principle

Solve problems involving

Bernoullis principle

FIZIKMOZAC

3.1
IDEA

Activity 1: Solve problems involving pressure

1. A rectangular concrete block with a
dimension 0.5 m x 0.6 m x 1.0 m has a mass
of 500 kg. Calculate the
(a)
maximum pressure
(b) minimum pressure exerted by the
concrete on the ground

You can press a thumbtack into a piece of wood.

Why cant you press your thumb into the same
piece of wood even though you exert the same
amount of force?
2.

A student pressing a thumbtack into a piece

of wood with a force of 20 N. The surface
area of the head of the thumbtack is 1 cm2
and the cross-sectional area of the tip of the
thumbtack is 0.01 cm2.

It is easier to walk on the beach with boots

compared to high-heeled shoes. The pointed
heels of high-heeled shoes will sink into the soft
ground.
The effect of an applied force on a surface
depends on the surface area of contact.
Calculate:
(a)
the pressure exerted by the students
thumb on the head of the thumbtack

Define Pressure and state its formula

Pressure is defined as _______________________
Pressure = Force
Area

F
P
A

(b)

the pressure of the tip of the thumbtack

on the wood.

The SI unit : ________ = ___________, Pa

What conclusion can be drawn from your answers

to (a) and (b)?

State relation-ship between pressure and area.

The pressure of a given force __________ as the
surface area decreases

..
3.

Amy and Mimi are identical twins each

weighing 450 N. The twins standing on one
leg while doing an aerobic routine in a field.
By comparing the pressure exerted on the
field by the twins, explain why Mimis shoes
are more suitable for the occasion compared
with Amys shoes.

FIZIKMOZAC

Wall foundations have

a large horizontal area
to ________ pressure
on the ground.

Activity 2: Application of High Pressure

Increasing the pressure by reducing the area
A sharp knife has a very
_____ surface area on
its cutting edge so that
______ pressure can be
exerted to cut the meat.

The studs on a
football boot have
only a _______ area of
contact with the
ground. The pressure
under the studs is
________ enough for
them to sink into the
ground, which gives
extra _______.

A wide shoulder pad of a

heavy bag will _________
the pressure exerted on
the shoulder of the person
carrying the bag.

Activity 3:
1. As a shop assistant, you are asked to place
some nails bought by a customer in a plastic
bag. However, the plastic bag is very thin and
the nails will likely poke through it. Suggest
way to place the nails in the plastic bag so
that the plastic bag will not be poked or torn
by the nails. Explain your answer.

2.
Nails, needles and pins have very _______ ends
with very small surface areas. When a force is
applied to the head of a nail, the _________
pressure will drive its sharp end into a piece of
wood easily.
Application of Low Pressure :Decreasing the
pressure by increasing area
Skis have a _________
area to reduce the
pressure on the snow
so that they do not
______ in too far.

A tractor moving on soft

ground has ______ tires to
reduce the pressure on
the ground so that they
will not sink into the
ground.

Figure (a) shows a boy sitting on a horizontal

wooden bar. When he stands on the same
horizontal bar as in Figure (b) it breaks.
(a) State one physical quantity that:

(i)

remains constant in both figure (a) and

figure (b). ________________
(ii) varies from figure (a) to figure (b). ______
(b)

Explain why the bar does not break in

figure (a) but breaks in figure (b).

...

FIZIKMOZAC

TUTORIAL 3.1
1.

1 Pa is equivalent to
A 1 N m2 B
1 m N-2
-2
C 1Nm D
1 m N2

2.

Figure shows a wooden block on a horizontal surface. The block will exert maximum pressure on a
horizontal surface if it is resting on its face

A STUV
C WXYZ
3.

B
D

TWXU
UVXY

The diagram shows a block with the dimensions of 1 m x 2 m x 3 m. The weight of the block is 1000 N.

What is the maximum pressure that can be exerted by the block on the floor? (2005)
A 100.0 N m- 2
B 166.7 N m -2
C 333.3 N m - 2
D 500.0 N m -2
4.

The mass of a boy is 60 kg. The pressure exerted by the boy on a floor is 2 x 10 4 Pa. What is the area of
contact between the shoes base of the boy and the floor.
A 1.2 x 10 2 m-2
B 3.0 x 10-2 m-2
C 4.5 x 10-2 m-2
D 6.0 x 10-2 m-2
E 8.0 x 10-2 m-2

5.

Which shoe would exert the least pressure on the ground when worn by the same lady? (2004)

6.

Diagram below shows four different shapes of shoe heels worn by the same lady.

FIZIKMOZAC

Arrange the heels based on the pressure exerted on the ground, in ascending order. (2006)
A.
B.
C.
D.

P, Q, R, S
S, P, Q, R
R, P, Q, S
S, Q, P, R

7.

Which of the following wooden rods exerts the highest pressure on the floor if each load and each
wooden rod has the same mass respectively? (2007)

8.

Diagram 6 shows a durian and a coconut of the same mass placed in two identical plastic bags.

Why does the plastic bag containing the durian tear more easily? (2008)

9.

A. The surface area of the durian that is in contact with the plastic bag is larger
B. The force exerted by the durian on the plastic bag is larger
C. The pressure exerted by the durian on the plastic bag is larger
D. The volume of the durian is larger
The following diagrams show four different postures of an elephant performing a circus. Which posture
exerts the maximum pressure on the floor? (2010)

FIZIKMOZAC

10. Diagram 7 shows a coin being pressed by a block of wood.

Which physical quantity increases when a greater force is exerted? (2012)

A.
Power
B.
Work
C.
Energy
D.
Pressure
PAPER 2, SECTION A
1. SPM 2003 paper 2 A8
Figure(a) and Figure(b) show two ways in which a gardener moves a wheelbarrow on a muddy road.

Figure(a)
(a)

Figure(b)

On Figure(a) and Figure(b), indicate and label:

(i) the direction of force F exerted by the gardener on the handle of each wheelbarrow to make it
move.
(ii) the direction of the vertical component Fy , of the force in (a)(i)
[2 marks]

(b)(i) Based on the answers in (a)(i) and (a)(ii), which of the ways is more suitable on the muddy road?
[1 mark]
.

FIZIKMOZAC

(ii) Explain the reason for your answer in (b)(i).

[2 marks]
(c)

The wheel of the wheelbarrow exerted pressure on the muddy road . The resultant force exerted by the
wheel on the road surface is 500 N and the area of the wheel in contact with the road is 2 x 10 -3 m2.
(i) What does the word pressure mean?
..
[1 mark]
(ii) Calculate the pressure exerted on the surface of the muddy road.
[2 marks]

(iii) State one modification that could be made to the wheelbarrow to reduce the pressure exerted on the
road. Explain your answer.
.
.
[2 marks]

3.2
What is Pressure in Liquids?
A liquid in a container exerts pressure because of its ____________.
For example, if you try to put your finger over the end of a tap when it is turned on, you can feel the pressure
of the water in the pipe.
Pressure in liquid acts in all _______________.

Activity 1
1. Fill a plastic bag with water and poke several holes in various part of it with needles.
Squeeze the plastic bag gently from the top.
Observations:

Conclusion:

FIZIKMOZAC

_______________________________________
2.

Prepare a tall plastic

with plasticine and fill
Remove the plasticine
water out of the holes.
(a) Make a sketch to

bottle with a few holes at different heights. Seal the holes

the bottle with water.
from the holes simultaneously and observe the flow of
show the flow of water from the holes.

(b) What is the relationship between the pressure of water and the distance of its flow from the holes?
___________________________________
(c) What is the relationship between pressure of water and its depth?

Relate depth to pressure in liquid

The pressure in a liquid is _________ proportional to the depth.
The pressure in a liquid __________ with depth.

Relate density to pressure in liquid

The pressure in a liquid is __________ proportional to the density of the liquid.

State the pressure in liquid formula

The container on the
right has a base area
A. It is filled to a
depth h with a liquid
of density .
Calculate:
(a) volume of liquid =
(b) mass of liquid

(c) weight of liquid =

FIZIKMOZAC

(d) force on base =

(e) pressure
At a depth h in a liquid of density :
Pressure =
Where =

g=

h=

Derive unit for pressure in liquid:

Solve problems involving pressure in liquids
1. If the density of water is 1000 kg m-3, what is the pressure due to the water at the bottom of a swimming
pool 2 m deep?

2.

Given that the density of mercury is 13 600 kg m-3. Calculate the pressure of mercury at a point 40 cm
from the mercury surface.

3.

The figure shows a cross section of a dam. The density of water in the dam is 1000 kg m -3. The pressure
exerted by the water at X is .

4.

A deep- sea diver is wearing a watch that can withstand a maximum pressure of 4.5 x 106 Pa due to the
sea water. [Density of the sea water = 1030 kg m-3 , g = 10 N kg-1]
(a) Calculate the maximum depth the diver can dive without spoiling the watch

(b) If the surface area of the glass of the watch is 9.0 cm2 , calculate the force acting on the glass of the
watch due to the sea water at a depth of 100 m.

FIZIKMOZAC

5.

In the diagram below:

(a)
How does the pressure at A compare with the pressure at B?
..
(b)

How does the pressure at B compare with the pressure at D?

(c)

How does the pressure at A compare with the pressure at C?

(d)

Calculate the pressure at B due to the water.

(e)

If the water in the system were replaced with paraffin, how would this affect the pressure at B?

6.

The figure shows a bottle filled with 40 cm height of liquid A and 70 cm height of liquid B. The densities
of liquid A and liquid B are 1000 kg m-3 and 2500 kg m-3 respectively.
What is the pressure of
(a)
liquid A at point P?
(b) liquid A and liquid B at point Q?

Describe the applications of pressure in liquids

1. Dam holds water at high altitude. The wall of the dam has to be thicker at the base than at the top
because it must withstand the __________ pressure in depths of the water.

FIZIKMOZAC

2.

Water is stored in water tank at higher level so as to supply water at __________ pressure.

3.

A patient receiving intravenous drips of a certain fluid from a bottle. In order for the fluid to flow into the
vein, the bottle must be placed at a height above the injection site so it has __________ pressure to flow
into the veins of the patient.

4.

Submarine is built with thick wall so as to withstand enormous pressure at _________ depth

5.

(a) Figure (a) shows a container of herbal tea. Explain why the tea flows out of the tap at a fast speed.

(b)

Explain why when there is very little tea left in the container, it is easier for the tea to flow out of the
tap when the container is tilted as shown in figure (b).

6.

Why does the water pressure from a tap at the top floor is lower than the water pressure from a tap at the
bottom floor of an apartment?

..
.
TUTORIAL 3.2
1. An air bubble is at a depth of 5 m below the surface of a lake . What is the pressure of water on the
bubble if the density of the water is 1 000 kg m-3?
A. 5 x 10-3 Pa
B. 2 x 10 2 Pa
C. 5 x 10 3 Pa
D. 5 x 104 Pa
2.

The figure shows a high tin with a length of 100 cm is filled to the full with water.

FIZIKMOZAC

If the pressure caused by the water at point P is 8000 Pa, What is the value of L?
(Density of water = 1000 kg m - 3 )
A 10 cm
B 20 cm
C 60 cm
D 80 cm
3.

Which one of the following is not true?

A
The pressure in a liquid increases with depth
B
The pressure in a liquid increases with density of the water
C
The pressure in a liquid increases with area of contact
D
The pressure in a liquid increases with the gravitational acceleration

4.

The figures show liquids in containers. Which column of liquid exerts the greatest pressure on the base
of its container?

5.

The figure shows a polystyrene block being pushed to a depth of h cm from the water surface. P is the
water pressure acting on surface Q.

Which graph shows the relationship between P and h when the block is pushed deeper into the water?
(2005)

FIZIKMOZAC

6.

The figure shows three containers with different shapes filled with water with the same level. The
pressure caused by the water at point P , Q and R are P1 , P2 and P3 respectively.

Which comparison is correct?

A P1 > P 2 > P 3
B P1 < P2 < P 3
C P1=P2 = P3
7.

Equal masses of water are poured into four jars as shown. In which jar is the pressure exerted by the
water on the base the greatest?

8.

The figure shows three wooden blocks J,K and L are pressed into the water until the base of its reach at
level P.
The pressure caused by the water at base of the wooden blocks J , K and L are X 1 , X2 and X3
respectively.

Which comparison is correct?

A X1 > X 2 > X 3
B X1 < X2 < X 3
C X1=X2 = X3
9.

The figure shows a siphon system.

Which of the following is true?

FIZIKMOZAC

A
B
C
D

Water in beaker A flows into beaker B until the volume of water in beaker A is the same as the
volume of water in beaker B
Water in beaker A flows into beaker B until the level of water in beaker A is the same as the level of
water in beaker B
Water in beaker A flows into beaker B until beaker B is full
Water in beaker A flows into beaker B until beaker B is empty

10. Diagram below shows the process of supplying water from a water tank on a hill to a water tank X on a
tall building.

Calculate the pressure of the water at X. [Density of water = 1000 kgm-3] (2006)
A. 1.4 x 105 N m-2
B. 1.6 x 105 N m-2
C. 2.6 x 105 N m-2
D. 3.0 x 105 N m-2

11. Diagram below shows a fish in the sea.

What is the pressure exerted by the water on the fish? (2007)

[water density = 1 000 kgm-3]
A. 6 x 10-3 Pa
B. 6 x 101 Pa
C. 6 x 103 Pa
D. 6 x 104 Pa
13. The wall of a dam is much thicker at the bottom than at the top because
A
pressure of water at the upper level is higher than pressure of water at the deeper level
B
pressure of water at the upper level is lower than pressure of water at the deeper level
C
pressure of water at the upper level is the same as than pressure of water at the deeper level
14. Diagram 7 shows two identical containers containing liquid P and liquid Q.

FIZIKMOZAC

When the height of liquid P is 15 cm and the height of liquid Q is 20 cm, water spurt is the same. The
density of liquid P is 2.0 g cm-3. What is the density of liquid Q? (2008)
A. 0.67 g cm-3
B. 1.30 g cm-3
C. 1.50 g cm-3
D. 2.70 g cm-3
15. Diagram 6 shows a container filled with water.

A.
B.
C.

Which is the correct comparison of the pressures at P and Q? (2009)

Pressure a P > pressure at Q
Pressure at P = pressure at Q
Pressure at P < pressure at Q
16. Diagram 10 shows the water piping system of a house.

What is the water pressure in the tap? Density of water = 1 000 kg m-3 and atmospheric pressure = 1.0 x
105 Pa. (2008)
A. 8.0 x 103 Pa
B. 5.8 x 104 Pa
C. 1.08 x 105 Pa
D. 1.58 x 105 Pa
17. Diagram 8 shows two divers in a lake and a diver in a sea. The pressure of water at T, S and U is P T , PS

and PU respectively.
Diagram 8
Which of the following comparisons is correct about the pressure exerted on the divers? (2010)
A. Pu > PT > PS
B. Pu < PT < PS

FIZIKMOZAC

C.
D.
18.

Pu = P T > P S
Pu = P T < P S
Diagram 9 shows water spurting out from a container at different depths.

Diagram 9
Which graph shows the correct relationship between the pressure exerted by the water, p and the
depth of the water, h? (2010)

19. Diagram 9 shows two divers. The mass of both divers are assumed to be the same.

The diver in position N experiences greater pressure than the diver in position M because (2012)
A.
The weight of diver at position N is greater than the eight of diver at position M
B.
The depth of water at N is greater than the depth of water at M
C.
The density of water at N is higher than the density of water at M
D.
The buoyant force acing on diver N is greater than the buoyant force acting at diver M.
20. Diagram 11 shows three similar balls, X, Y and Z fully immersed in olive oil, glycerine and turpentine
respectively. The depth of each ball is the same. The type of thread and weight used are also the
same.

FIZIKMOZAC

A.
B.
C.

Which ball experiences the lowest pressure? (2012)

X
Y
Z

1. Question 2: Kelantan 10
Diagram 2.1 shows two different containers filled with water. The water pressure at point P and point Q are
the same.

(a) What is the meaning of pressure?

.........................................................
[1 mark]
(b) State one factor that affect the water pressure at point P and Q.
..........................................................
[1 mark]
(c) Calculate the water pressure at point P.
[Density of water = 1000 kgm-3]
[2 marks]

(d) Diagram 2.2 shows the water spurt when a hole is made near the base of container B.

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 2.2
Diagram 2.3 shows the water in container B is replaced by liquid X which has higher density than water.

Diagram 2.3
Sketch the spurt of liquid X in Diagram 2.3.
[1 mark]
2. SPM 2007 paper 2 A2
Diagram 2 shows a water tank that supplies water to a block of flats. The water flows to each unit of the flat
due to water pressure.

a.

What is meant by pressure?

............................................................................
[1 m]

b.

A water tank with a height of 3.0 m is fully filled with water. Calculate the water pressure at the base of
the water tank.
[Density of water = 1 000 kgm -3]

FIZIKMOZAC

[2 m]

c.

Based on Diagram 2, compare the water pressure at P and at Q. Explain your answer.
.............................................................................
[2 m]

3.3
ACTIVITY 1:Idea of Gas Pressure
1. Use a bicycle pump to pump
(a)

When air is pumped

air into a deflated ball

into a ball, what changes do you observe in the ball?

..
.
(b)

How would you know

when there is enough air in the ball?

FIZIKMOZAC

.
When you squeeze a ball filled with air, you will feel an __________ force acting from the inside of the ball.
The force comes from billions and billions of air molecules striking the inner wall of the ball.
The molecules are in constant ________ motion.
When the molecules _________ with the inner wall of the ball, the force of collisions _________ the wall
outwards.
The __________ exerted on the inner wall of the ball results in the air / gas pressure in the ball.

Explain gas pressure

The gas pressure in a container is caused by the __________ of gas molecules with the walls of the
container.
Gas/Air pressure is the force exerted on a surface by air molecules per unit area of the surface.

Explain atmospheric pressure

Atmospheric pressure is the pressure caused by the _______ of the air above us.

Atmospheric pressure acts ___________ in all directions.

Atmospheric pressure varies with the _________ of the object above sea level. It _____________ with the
altitude or the height above sea level. At higher altitudes, the __________ and the temperature of the air
are lower. As a result, the frequency of __________ of the molecules is lower. Hence, atmospheric
pressure is __________.

ACTIVITY 2: Experiments to show the existence of the atmospheric pressure

FIZIKMOZAC

1.

Fill an empty plastic bottle with hot water until it is about a quarter full. Tighten the cap immediately and
wait for a few seconds.

Observation:

The _________ from the boiling water drives out the air from the plastic bottle.
The cap prevents outside _______ from flowing into the bottle. When cold water is poured on it, the steam
inside the bottle __________ to water and it forms partial __________ inside the bottle.
The atmospheric pressure outside which is _____________ then compress the bottle.

2.

Fill a glass with water until it is almost full. Place a cardboard over the glass. By supporting the
cardboard on the top of the glass, slowly invert the glass. Slowly remove the hand that is supporting the
cardboard.

The cardboard ______________ and the water ___________________

The explanation for this phenomenon is that the resultant force caused by the ____________ pressure acts
on the surface of the cardboard is ________ than the weight of the water in the glass.
Describe the applications of atmospheric pressure
1.

2.

Drinking Straw
When drinking from a straw, one tends to suck the straw. This causes the pressure inside the straw
_________.
The outside atmospheric pressure is _________ will then act on the surface of the water in the glass,
causing it to rise up the straw.

A rubber sucker which is ________ onto a flat smooth surface cannot be easily removed from the
surface.

FIZIKMOZAC

When the cup of the rubber sucker is leveled, the ______ from the lower portion of the cup will be
crushed out
A _____ pressure area will be formed in the cup. A higher ___________ pressure will now press the sucker
firmly onto the surface
3.

Syringe
When the piston of
zone is created
The _________
syringe.

4.

the syringe is pulled upwards, a ______ pressure

within it.
atmospheric pressure will push the water into the

Vacuum Cleaner

A fan sucks out the ________ from space A . The pressure inside the vacuum cleaner is ________.
The atmospheric pressure is ___________ than the pressure inside the vacuum cleaner.
The dust and dirt is __________ into the cleaner. The bag acts as a filter, stopping the dust and dirt, but not
the air.
5.

Siphon
A siphon is very useful for removing liquids from a tank or a fixed container.
For example, dirty water is sucked out of an aquarium.
It consists of a tube which has been filled with liquid and one end of it is placed in a tank.

6.

Difference in water level will cause difference in ______________

The water pressure at C is the ___________ as the atmospheric pressure at A, and B.
The water pressure at D = atmospheric pressure + h g
The __________ water pressure causes water to flow out at D.
This produces a vacuum / _______ pressure area in the tube (CD)
The atmospheric pressure at A and B which is ___________ will push the water to flow continuously
into the tube.
This process will continue as long as both ends of tube are ___________ the water level
Pouring our condensed milk from its can

1.

FIZIKMOZAC

The presence of a second hole is to enable _____ to flow into the can.
This results in the pressure of air in the can _______ as the atmospheric pressure.
The atmospheric pressure will ___________ the milk out of the lower hole.
7.

Explain why the Malaysia Boleh sticker sticks well to the helmet when on the surface of the Earth but
falls off from the same helmet when the astronaut stands on the surface of the Moon.

Atmospheric Pressure Measuring Instrument

Mercury Barometer

FIZIKMOZAC

The barometer is made by filling a long glass tube with mercury. The tube is
then turned upside down in a bow of mercury. The mercury level in the tube will drop until a level h = 76 cm
above the mercury level in the bowl.
(a) Why the level does not drop further?
_______________________________________
(b) Pressure at A is due to the _______________
(c) Pressure at B is due to the ________________
(d) Pressure at C = ____
(e) Compare the pressure at A and B.

Atmospheric pressure ______ Mercury Pressure

(f)

If the density of the mercury is 1.36 x 104 kg m-3 and the acceleration due to gravity is 10 ms-2, calculate
the atmospheric pressure in pascal.

(g) What is the value of the atmospheric pressure in cm Hg?

(h) What is the pressure at point x in cm Hg?
(i)

The density of water is 1000 kg m-3. If a barometer is made using water instead of mercury, and a very
long tube, how high is the water column.

Question 2
If a mercury barometer were carried up a mountain, how would you expect the height of the mercury column
to change? Explain.

FIZIKMOZAC

Question 3
The diagram shows a mercury barometer. Gas X is trapped in a glass tube. If the vertical height of the
mercury level is 40 cm of Hg and the atmospheric pressure is 75 cm Hg, calculate the pressure exerted by
the gas X inside the tube.

2.
(a)
(b)

Aneroid Barometer
An aneroid barometer consists of a flexible metal can which most of the air inside the can has been
taken out of it.
When the surrounding pressure _________, the top of the can is squeezed down slightly causing the
pointer to move along the curved scale measuring the corresponding pressure.

Instruments for Measuring Gas Pressure and Atmospheric Pressure

1. Bourdon Gauge
The movement of a gas into the hollow copper tube causes it to straighten slightly.
A system of lever and gear will enable a pointer to move along the round scale indicating the pressure of the
gas measured.

2. Manometer
A manometer consists of a U-tube that is filled with a liquid like water, oil or mercury.

In figure (a) when both ends of the tube is exposed to __________ pressure, both levels are the same.

FIZIKMOZAC

In figure (b) when one end is connected to a gas supply, the difference in level, h gives the pressure of the
gas, P.

(a) What is the total pressure a point W?

(b) Compare the pressure at W and the gas pressure.

..
(c) Write an equation that relate between Patmopherice , Pmercury and Pgas.
..

Show the direction of Pgas , Patmospheric and Pmecury.

Given Patmospheric = 76 cm Hg dan h = 20 cm, find the value of Pgas

Pgas =

FIZIKMOZAC

Pgas =

Pgas =

Question 2
A mercury manometer with one end attached to a gas supply measures a difference in the level of mercury of
32 cm.
Calculate the pressure of the gas supply in
(a)
cm Hg
(b) pascal
[Patmospheric = 76 cm Hg, g = 10 Nkg-1 density of mercury = 1.36 x 104 kg m-3]

TUTORIAL 3.3
1. Gas pressure exits because the gas molecules
A. move randomly and freely
B. move at the same velocity
C. collide with one another in elastic collisions and with the walls of the container in
D. collides with the wall of the container produces change of momentum
2.

Which one of the following pairs of measuring instruments to measure gas pressure is true?
A. Bourdon gauge and manometer
B. Manometer and Fortins barometer
C. Bourdon gauge and Fortin barometer

FIZIKMOZAC

D.

Fortins barometer Fortin and Aneroid barometer

3.

The figure shows a manometer used to determine pressure in a gas tank.

4.

Which comparison is correct about pressure in the gas tank with the atmospheric pressure? (2004)
A
Pressure in the gas tank is equal to the atmospheric pressure
B
Pressure in the gas tank is greater than the atmospheric pressure
C Pressure in the gas tank is less than the atmospheric pressure
The figure shows a manometer is connected to a gas supply.

If the atmospheric pressure is 76 cm Hg determine the pressure of the gas.

A 30 cm Hg
B
46 cm Hg
C 76 cm Hg
D
106 cm Hg
5.

We do not experience the atmospheric pressure at sea level because

A. the atmospheric is very light
B. the density of atmospheric is less than the density of our body
C. the force exerted by the atmospheric pressure is zero
D. the pressure of our body equal to the atmospheric pressure

6.

The figures show a simple mercury barometer. Which one shows the height, h, to be measure to find
atmospheric pressure?

7.

The figure shows a mercury barometer.

What happen to the height of h if the glass tube is tilted ?

A decreases

FIZIKMOZAC

B increases
C remains unchanged

8.

Normally mercury is used in a barometer because it is

A expands uniformly
B has a higher density
C has a higher boiling point
D does not stick to the glass tube

9.

The figure shows a suction pump being pressed against a smooth wall. The pump sticks to the wall
when released.

The pump sticks to the wall because . (2005)

A
the atmospheric pressure is equal to the pressure inside the pump
B
the atmospheric pressure is less than the pressure inside the pump
C
the atmospheric pressure is more than the pressure inside the pump
10. A suction pump is pulled upwards to remove dirt from a blocked sink pipe. Which diagram shows the
pressures correctly? (2008)

11. The figure shows a mercury barometer.

FIZIKMOZAC

What is the pressure at point X?

[ The atmospheric pressure = 75 cm Hg ]
A 0 cm Hg B 65 cm Hg
C 75cm Hg
D 85 cm Hg
E 100 cm Hg
12. The figure shows a mercury barometer.

If the vacuum space in the tube is filled with gas X , what is the pressure of gas X?
[ The atmospheric pressure = 75 cm Hg ]
A 0 cm Hg B 20 cm Hg
C 55 cm Hg
D 75 cm Hg
E 95 cm Hg
13. Diagram below shows a simple barometer. The difference in height of the two mercury levels is h.

What happens to the value of h when mercury is added to the container? (2007)
A. Increases
B. Decreases
C. No change
14. Diagram 8 shows a boy sucking an empty packet drink.

A.
B.
C.

Which statement describes this situation? (2012)

Pressure inside the drink packet < the atmospheric pressure
Pressure inside the drink packet > the atmospheric pressure
Pressure inside the drink packet = the atmospheric pressure

15. Which of the following situations only occurs due to atmospheric pressure? (2007)

FIZIKMOZAC

16. Diagram 10 shows a manometer connected to a balloon.

Diagram 10
What is the pressure, PB, inside the balloon? (2010)
( = density of mercury, g = gravitational acceleration, Patm = atmospheric pressure)
A. PB = hg
B. PB = Patm hg
C. PB = Patm - hg
17. Diagram 13 shows a manometer being connected to a gas X supply.

Atmospheric pressure is 76 cm Hg. What is the pressure of gas X? (2012)

76 cm Hg
80 cm Hg
84 cm Hg
88 cm Hg
PAPER 2 SECTION A
1. The figure shows an arrangement of apparatus is used to determine the atmospheric pressure in a
laboratory. The length of the glass tube is 100 cm and the atmospheric pressure in the lab is 75 cm Hg.

FIZIKMOZAC

(a)

Name the apparatus as shown in the figure.

(b) Name the space P.

(c)(i)

What is the value of h?

(ii) Give one reason why dont the mercury column drops until it reaches the level of the mercury
in the dish?
..
.
(d) Determine the pressure in units cm Hg at point
(i)

(ii)

(e) What will happen to the value of h if

(i) the tube is raised through a height 10 cm
.
(ii) the tube is lowered through a depth of 5 cm

(iii)
the glass tube is inclined about 50 from the vertical line.

(iv)

the surrounding temperature increases.

..

(v)

the apparatus is placed on the top of a mountain.

.

FIZIKMOZAC

(vi)

the space P in the tube is filled with the little of water.

..

3.

(a) Why does the pressure in a

plane cabin which fly at a high altitude must be maintained at the atmospheric pressure at the sea
level?
..
..
(b)

What will happen if one of the plane wind screen broke suddenly? Explain your answer.

3.4
Idea:
A car at a workshop can be
raised up for service by pushing
only one switch. This is one
application of Pascals Principle
in our daily life.

Activity 1:
3. Squeeze a toothpaste tube. How does the pressure exerted by the thumb transfer to the mouth of the
tube?

FIZIKMOZAC

4.

When the
direction with

piston is push, why does water spurt out in all

the same speed?
..

State Pascals

Principle

Explain hydraulic system

A hydraulic system is a device in which a small applied force can give rise to a larger force.

A small input force, F1 is applied to the small piston, a ____________ is produced and will be
_____________ throughout the liquid towards the big piston __________.
Based on the Pascals Principle,
Pressure at small cylinder _____ Pressure at
large cylinder
F1 = F2
A1 A2
Where:
F1 = Input force F2 = Output force A1 = input piston area A2 = output piston area

Pressure multiply by surface area A2 will produce an output force F2.

F2 will lift up the load
Hydraulic systems act as a _______ multiplier. They multiply the input force by a certain factor to gain a
larger output force.
The magnitude of the force at the large piston depends on
(a) the _________, applied to the small piston,
(b) the ratio of the ___________ area of the piston,

FIZIKMOZAC

When incompressible fluid is moved through a hydraulic system, the volume through which the input
system moved must be the ________ as the volume through which the output system, Hence A1d1 =
A2 d 2

A hydraulic system must not contain any _____ bubbles in any position of its hydraulic fluid system. This
will reduce the _________ of the system as part of the applied force will be used up to compress the air
bubbles.

Solve problem involving Pascals principle

1.The figure shows a simple hydraulic system. Assume there is no friction in the system.

(a)

what is the pressure at A?

(b)

what is the pressure at B?

(c)

what is the upward force produced?

(d)

What is the effect on the hydraulic system if the cross-sectional area of the large piston is
increase?

1.

A basic hydraulic system has small and large pistons with cross-sectional areas of 2 cm2 and 50 cm2
respectively. When a force of 20 N is applied to the small piston, it pushes down the piston by 20 cm.

Calculate
(a) the pressure transmitted in the hydraulic fluid,

(b) the force acting on the large piston,

(c) the distance moved by the large piston

FIZIKMOZAC

(d) the magnification of the force.

Application of Pascals Principle
(1) Hidraulik Jack

When the handle is pulled, valve A is still closed and valve B opens so the ________ can be transmitted
to the larger piston. The large piston will rise.
While the small piston is pulled out, valve B closes and valve A opens so the _____ in the tank enter into
the hydraulic cylinder as a result of atmospheric pressure.
By moving the push-pull handle a number of times, the large piston can be raised carrying a heavy load.
The load is lowered without using the handle by opening the ___________ valve.

(2) Hydraulic Brake

(ii)

Explain how does the brake system work?

When the drivers foot presses the brake pedal, the piston in the master cylinder exerts _____________
on the brake fluid.
This pressure is ____________ to the wheel cylinder of all wheels.
On the figure above indicate the direction of motions of the front brake cylinder and the rear brake
cylinder.
(iii) The pressure causes the pistons to press the brake shoes against the wheels. This produces
_____________ force that cause the car to slow down or stop.
(iv) State the relationship between the liquid pressure in the front brake cylinder and the rear brake cylinder.

(v) Explain why the piston of the wheel cylinder is larger than that of the master cylinder.

(vi)

What is the function of the return spring?

FIZIKMOZAC

___________________________________________
(vii) Why is the brake system in the car is less effective air bubbles are present in the brake fluid?

(viii)
Why is the cross-sectional area of the rear brake cylinder of the right wheel is the same as the
cross-sectional area of the rear brake cylinder of the left wheel?

3.

A boy invented a machine to compress old newspaper. The machine consists of a hydraulic system with
two pistons. Piston A has a smaller cross-sectional area compared to piston B.

(a) the function of this machine is based on a principle in physics. Name the principle,
..
(b)

Explain why a small force exerted by the boy can result in a much bigger force acting on the old
newspaper

4.

Figure shows a hydraulic lift commonly used in a workshop. Highly compressed air is used to push the
piston upwards. The force produces is enough to lift a car.

By referring to the diagram, explain how a car

(a)

can be lifted by the hydraulic lift.

(b)

Explain how the car can be lowered after rep air works are done

FIZIKMOZAC

5.

Figure shows dentist treating a patient. The dentist presses on the input piston to raise the patient. The
cross-sectional areas of the input piston and the output piston are 400 cm 2 and 600 cm2 respectively.
(a) Describe how the patient is raised to a certain height.

(b)

How much force is exerted by the dentist in order to raise a patient of 54 kg?

(c)

If the patient is raised to a height of 8 cm, how far should input piston be pushed down?

TUTORIAL 3.4
1.

The figure shows a hydraulic pump.

R

Which comparison is true?

A. The force F is the same as the weight of the load
B. The force F is greater than the weight of the load
C. The pressure on piston P is the same as the pressure on piston Q
D. The pressure on piston P is smaller than the pressure on piston Q
2.

A force of 20N is applied to the input piston in a hydraulic jack. If the input piston area and output piston
area are 0.02 m2 and 0.1 m2 respectively, what is the output force?
A 20 N
B
50 N
C 100 N
D
200 N
E 400 N

3.

If the area of input piston and output piston are 0.03 m2 and 0.90 m2 respectively, what is the mass of
object P.
A 3.2 x 102 kg
B
2.4x 102kg
2
C 2.0 x 10 kg
D
1.8x 102kg
E 1.2x 102 kg

4.

The figure shows a brake system of a car.

FIZIKMOZAC

Which principle is used in this system?

A Pascals principle
B Bernoullis principle
C Archimedes principle
D Principle of conservation of momentum
5.

Diagram below shows toothpaste being squeezed out from the tube.

Which principle explains the situation above? (2007)

A. Pascal
B. Bernoulli
C. Archimedes
6.

Diagram 8 shows a hydraulic brake system.

A driver steps on the brake pedal. Which relationship is correct?(2008)

A. Pressure on P < Pressure on Q
B. Pressure on P = Pressure on Q
C. Pressure on P > Pressure on Q
7.

Diagram 11 shows the shovel and the arm of a digger lifting a heavy load.

Diagram 11
Which principle is used in the arm of the digger? (2010)
A. Pascals principle
B. Bernoullis principle

FIZIKMOZAC

C.
D.

8.

Principle of equilibrium of forces

Principle of conservation of momentum

Diagram 12 shows a cross-sectional of a hydraulic jack. The weight of a car is 2.0 x 10 6 kg and the ration
between the surface areas of the master piston to the slave piston is 1:15.

What is the force exerted on the master piston? (2012)

A. 1.3 x 106 N
B. 1.3 x 107 N
C. 3.0 x 106 N
D. 3.0 x 107 N

9.

SPM 2008 Question 7

Diagram 7.1 shows a hydraulic system. A force F is exerted on the small piston.

(a)

(i) Name the principle involved

in this hydraulic system.

[1 mark]
(ii)

Compare the pressure at point P and at point Q.

[1 mark]

(b)

Diagram 7.2 shows a hydraulic jack in a car service centre.

FIZIKMOZAC

(j)

A force of 50 N is exerted on the small piston when the handle is pushed down. The cross-sectional
areas of the small piston and the large piston are 0.04 m2 and 0.8 m2 respectively.
Calculate the pressure exerted on the oil in the hydraulic jack.
[2 marks]

(ii)

Calculate the force that the oil exerts on the large piston.
[1 mark]

(c)

Based on Diagram 7.2,

(i) explain how the handle is used to lift the load to its maximum height.,

[2 marks]
(d)

explain one modification to the large piston that enables the jack to lift a heavier load,
marks]

[2

..
.

(e)

state how the load is lowered without using the handle.

[1 mark]

3.5
ACTIVITY 1 : Feel the Buoyancy

FIZIKMOZAC

1.

Fill full a container with water. Push an empty mineral water bottle into the water slowly.

(a) Do you feel any force when the bottle is pushed downward? State the direction of the force.

(b) When you push the bottle deeper, what happen to the:
Force

I.

_________________________________
II.

Volume of water displaced?

____________________________________
(c) State the relationship between the buoyant force acted on the bottle and the volume of water
displaced.

(d) What will happen to the bottle when you release your hand?
___________________________________
2.

Tie a piece of stone with a string and hang it on the hook of a spring balance.
Measure and record the weight of the stone in air. Immerse the stone into a beaker of water. Measure
and record the weight of the stone.

Weight of stone in air, W1 = ______

Weight of stone in water ,W2 = ________
(a) Compare the values of W1 and W2 .

(b) What conclusion can you make?

FIZIKMOZAC

Explain Bouyant Force

The buoyant force is an _______ force resulting from an object being wholly or partially immersed in a fluid.

Relation-ship between the volume of the object immersed and the volume of the liquid displaced
1.

When an object is put into the water, the water level will ______________.

2.

An object will __________ a liquid when it is immersed in the liquid.

Volume of water without apple

= _______ cm3
Volume of water + apple
= _____ cm3
Volume of displaced water
= _____ cm3
Volume of apple immersed in water = _____ cm3
The volume of the immersed part on an object in a liquid is __________ to the volume of the displaced liquid
Bouyant force and the lost of weight
When an object is immersed into water, two observation:
1. The object will experience a lost in weight. The weight of object in water is
less than its weight in air. The apparent loss in weight is caused by the
bouyant force.
Bouyant force = (actual) weight (apparent) weight
in air
in water.
2.

Volume of liquid displaced = volume of the immersed part of

Example:

Weight of stone in air = ________

the object.

FIZIKMOZAC

Weight of stone in water = _____

(apparent weight)
Lost of weight = ___________
Bouyant force = ___________
How does a buoyant force exists?
As pressure in
surface is ________
The downward
The upward force,
So F2 is ________
The resultant force,
The direction of the
This force is known as

Experiment 3.1:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

liquid _______ with depth, the pressure, P1 at the top

than pressure P2 on the bottom surface.
force, F1 = _________
F2 = _________
than F1
F = _________
resultant force is ________
__________ force.

Relationship between the weight of water displaced

and buoyant force

Pour water slowly into a eureka can until it flows out from the spout.
Weight an empty beaker and place it under the spout of the eureka can
Suspend a ball of plasticine at the hook of a spring balance by a string and weigh it in air.
Lower the plasticine into the eureka can until the plasticine is completely immersed in water. Record the
reading of the spring balance.
When there is no more water flowing out from the spout, weight the beaker and water.

Result:
Weight of plasticine in air / N
Weight of plasticine in water / N
Loss in weight of the object , / N
Mass of empty beaker / kg
Mass of beaker + displace water / kg
Mass of water displaced / kg
Weight of water displaced/ N
Discussion:
1. From the analysis of data, what is the relationship between
(a) the apparent loss in weight of the plasticine and buoyant force?

FIZIKMOZAC

___________________________________
(b) The apparent loss in weight of the plasticine and the weight of water displaced?
___________________________________
(c) The weight of water displaced and buoyant force?
________________________________
What is the conclusion from this experiment?

State Archimedes Principle

Relation-ship between buoyant force, density and volume of fluid displaced

From Archimedess Principle :
Buoyant Force

Thus

FB

= Weight of fluid displace

= mg
(note : F = ma)
= Vg
(note : = m )
V
= Vg

Where FB = ___________________________
= ___________________________
V = Volume of fluid ___________ or the volume of the object that ____________ in the fluid.

Volume of liquid displaced = volume of the immersed part of the object.

Equations for Buoyant force:
1. Buoyant force = Weight of fluid displaced
2. Buoyant force = Vg
3. Buoyant force = Weight of object in air weight of object in water

Solving problems involving Archimedes Principle

FIZIKMOZAC

Question 1

An object is hung from a spring.

(a) What is the buoyant force on the object in
water?
(b) What is the weight of water displaced by the object?
(c) Determine the volume of water displaced by
the object. [density of water = 1000 kgm-3]

(d) What is the volume of the object?

Question 2
A stone weights 2.5 N. When it is fully submerged
in a liquid, its apparent weight is 2.2 N.
Calculate the density of liquid if its volume displaced by the
stone is 25 cm3 (25 x 10-6 m3).

. These objects are floating stationary.

(a) Show and label the two forces acting for every situation.
(b) What is the relationship between the two forces.

FIZIKMOZAC

The floating object and buoyant force

Mass of apple = _________
Weight of apple = ________

Mass of an empty beaker = _______

Mass of an empty beaker + water = _______
Mass of the water displaced = ________
Weight of the water displaced = _______________
Buoyant Force and Flotation
Buoyant force = weight the object ________ and stationary
Buoyant force < weight
the object moves _______
Buoyant force > weight
the object moves ______
For an object to
float, the buoyant
force should be
_______l to the
weight of the floating
object.
Therefore for an
object to float, the
buoyant force must
equal to the weight
of the _______ and
also equal to weight
of the fluid
__________
Example 4

FIZIKMOZAC

The figure shows a glass

cross-sectional area 4 x
vertical in a beaker
[ Density of water is 1000
Determine
(a) The upthrust
(b) The mass of sand in

tube of mass 0.012 kg with uniform diameter and

10-4 m2 , and it is filled with sand so that it is made
containing water.
kg m-3 ]
the glass tube.

Example 5
The figure shows a balloon of
air.

mass 100 kg is floating in a stationary position in the

What is the upthrust

(buoyant force) of the balloon?

Application of Archimedes Principle

1. A floating ship

(a) The condition for a ship to float in sea water is weight of the ship ________ weight of sea water
displaced.
(b) Explain why a boat made of steel will float in water, but a block of steel will sink.
A block of steel will displaced a ________ volume of water only. So the buoyant force acting on it is
__________ than its weight. Therefore it __________.

A ship floats on the surface of the sea because the volume of water displaced by the ship is
sufficiently _________. The weight of water displaced is large so the buoyant force acting on the
ship is also __________. Weight of ship _________ buoyant force. Therefore it floats.

Although a ship is constructed of metal, which has a larger density than water, its shape is hollow so
that the overall density of the ship is _________ than the sea water.
As a result, the ________ force acting on the ship is large enough to support its weight.

(c) Figure 1 and 2 show a same boat sailing in the sea water and the river. Explain why a boat will
submerged deeper in the river.

FIZIKMOZAC

figure 1

figure 2

The buoyant forces in the sea and in the river are the ___________
This is because the buoyant force is equal to the __________ of the boat which is unchanged.
The density of fresh water is __________ than sea water.
The buoyant force of a floating boat is equal to the __________ of water displaced.
The lower the density of the water, the ___________ the volume of water displaced.
A boat must displace more water to obtain sufficient _________ force to support its weight.
(d) If extra weight is put into the boat, why will the boat float lower in the water?

It displaces more water so that there is a __________ buoyant force to support the extra weight.
(e) What is the purpose of Plimsoll line mark on a ship?

The __________ of sea water varies with location. It is to ensure that a ship is loaded within
______ limits, the Plimsoll line marked on the body of the ship acts as a guide.
A ship will be submerged deeper in fresh water because the density of fresh water is _______
than the sea water. For this reason, a ship must displace more water to obtain sufficient
_________ force to support its weight.
Moreover, a ship can float __________ in the cold season as cold water has a higher density.

2. Submarine

FIZIKMOZAC

A submarine has a large ___________ tank, which is used to control its position and depth from the
surface of the sea.
When the ballast tanks are filled with ___________, the buoyant force is smaller than the weight of the
submarine. The submarine sinks.
When the ballast tanks are filled with ______ , the buoyant force is larger than the weight of the
submarine. The submarine __________.

3. Hydrometer
A hydrometer is an
________ such as
It consists of a tube
bulb to weigh it down

instrument used to measure the relative density of

milk or acid in accumulators.
with a bulb at one end. Lead shots are placed in the
and enable the hydrometer floats vertically in the liquid.

In a liquid of lesser density, a __________volume of liquid must be displaced to achieve the buoyant
force needed to balance the weight of the hydrometer. So the more the hydrometer is submerged.
In a liquid with higher density, a __________ volume of liquid must be displaced to achieve the buoyant
force needed to balance the weight of the hydrometer. The hydrometer floats higher in a liquid of higher
density.
4. A hot air-balloon
A hot-air balloon
to the surrounding
When buoyant force
balloon, the balloon
When the total
remains __________

displaces a large volume of air. The buoyant force due

air is equal the weight of the air displaced.
is ________ than the weight of the total weight of the
will rise.
weight of the balloon is equal to the buoyant force, it
in the air

TUTORIAL 3.5
1.

The figure shows a load hung from a spring balance is slowly submerged in water until it is immersed
completely.

FIZIKMOZAC

What will happen to the spring balance reading?

A zero
B decreases until zero
C remains unchanged
D decreases until reaches a constant value
2.

A metal block has a volume 0.002 m3 is immersed in water. If the density of water is 1000 kg m-3, what is
the buoyant force experienced by the metal block?
A 40N
B
30N
C 20N
D
10N
E 5N

3.

The figure shows four spheres , P, Q, R and S floating on water.

Which comparison is correct about the density of spheres P,Q,R and S? (2005)
A. P > Q > R > S
B. S > Q > R > P
C. P > R > Q > S
D. Q > R > P >S
4.

Which of the following about a ship floating on the surface of sea is true?
A
The weight of the ship equals to mass of the sea water displaced
B
The weight of the ship equals to the weight of the sea water displaced
C
The weight of ship is less than the weight of the sea water displaced
The weight of the ship is more than the weight of the sea water displaced

5.

The figure shows a sphere object floating on the surface of a liquid.

Which of the following is true?

A
The volume of the liquid displaced by the sphere object equals to the volume of the sphere object
B
The weight of the liquid displaced by the sphere object equals to the weight of the sphere object
C
The mass of the sphere object equals to the mass of liquid in the container
D
The density of sphere object equals to the density of the object
6.

The figure shows a boy on a float.

FIZIKMOZAC

Which of the relationship between the physical quantities in the above situation is correct? (2003)
A
Weight of water displaced = weight of the boy + weight of the float
B
Weight of water displaced > weight of the boy + weight of the float
C
Volume of water displaced = volume of the boy + volume of the float
D
Volume of water displaced > volume of the boy + volume of the float
7.

The figure shows a boat has a safety limit line L. The volume of the boat under the line L is 4 m 3. The
mass of the boat is 200 kg.

[The density of water = 1000 kgm-3 ]

What is the maximum load can be carried by the boat to ensure the boat does not overload?
A 2.0 X 103 Kg
B 3.8 X 103 Kg
C 4.0 X 103 Kg
D 4.2 X 103 Kg
E 5.0 X 103 Kg
8.

The figure shows a metal block has a volume 0.5 m3 is tied to a string. The block is immersed in water.
[ Density of the metal block = 8 x 103 kg m-3, Density of water = 1 x 103 kg m-3 ]

What is the tension, T of the string?

A 3.0 x 104 N
B 3.5 x 104 N
C 4.0 x 104 N
D 4.5 x 104N
4
E 5.0 x 10 N
9.

Diagram below shows iceberg floating on the surface of the sea.

Which of the following statements is correct? (2007)

B. Weight of iceberg = Weight of sea water displaced.
C. Volume of iceberg =Volume of sea water displaced
D. Density of iceberg = Density of sea water displaced
10. Diagram 9 shows the readings of a compression balance and a spring balance.

FIZIKMOZAC

What happens to the reading of the compression balance and the reading of the spring balance when the
load is immersed in the water? (2008)

A
B
C
D

Compression
balance
Decreases
Increases
Decreases
Increases

Spring balance
Increases
Decreases
Decreases
Increases

11. Diagram 12 shows an airship floating at a constant height.

The upthrust exerted on the airship is equal to (2010)

A. the mass of the airship
B. the weight of the airship
C. the density of the airship
D. the volume of air displaced by the airship
12.

Diagram 14 shows two identical test tubes, P and Q, containing ball bearings X and Y. All the ball
bearings have the same size but different densities.

Diagram 14
The upthrust on the test tube P and Q are FP and FQ, respectively. Which comparison is correct? (2010)
A. FP = FQ
B. FP > FQ
C. FP < FQ

FIZIKMOZAC

13. Diagram 9 shows a wooden block on water.

Which statement explains this situation? (2009)

A. The weight of the wooden block < the upthrust
B. The weight of the wooden bloc = the upthrust
C. The weight of the wooden block > the upthrust
14. Diagram 10 shows a ship while at sea and riverbay.

What principle explains the position of the ship while at sea and riverbay? (2011)
E. Pascals principle
F. Bernoullis principle
G. Archimedes principle
PAPER 2 SECTION A
1. SPM 2003 Paper 2 A5
Figure(a), Figure(b) and Figure(c) show a spring balance supporting a metal block K in three situations.

(a)

(b)

(c)

(a) Compare the readings of the spring balance in Figure(a) and Figure(b)
____________________________
[1 m]
(b) Name three forces that act on K
when it partially or totally in water.
____________________________
[2 m]
(c) State and explain the relationship
between the forces in (b).
_____________________________
_____________________________
[2 m]
(d) Name the principle involved in (c)
_____________________________
[1 m]
(e)(i) What will happen to the reading

2.

FIZIKMOZAC

of the spring balance in Figure (c) if the water is replaced with salt solution?
___________________________
(ii)
Give one reason for your
answer.
__________________________
[1 m]
SPM 2009 Paper 2 A5
Diagram 5.1 and Diagram 5.2 show a spring balance supporting a metal block in two situations. The metal
blocks are identical.
The compression balance in Diagram 5.1 and in Diagram 5.2 show the readings of the weight of an empty
beaker and the weight of a beaker filled with water respectively. The beakes are identical.

Diagram 5.1

Diagram 5.2

(a) What is the meaning of weight?

[1 m]
(b) (i) What is the difference between the spring balance reading in Diagram 5.1 and Diagram 5.2?
..N

[1 m]

(iii) Name the force that is represented by the reading in 5(b)(i).

[1 m]
(c)(i) What is the reading of the
cmpression balance in Diagram 5.2?
.
[1 m]
(ii) Name the physical quantity that is represented by the
reading in 5(c)(i)

[1 m]
(d)(i) Relate the answers in 5(b)(ii)
and 5(c)(ii).
......................
[1 m]
(ii) Name the physics principle
involved in these situations.
..

FIZIKMOZAC

[1 m]
(e) What happens to the spring balance reading in Diagram 5.2 when the metal block is immersed deeper
into the water?

[1 m]

3.6
A Boeing 747 aircraft can carry 400 to 500 of passengers. How can the plane fly with the heavy load? Why a
Formula-1 car can go through a sharp curve while travelling at 300 km per hour?

Activity 1: To study the relationship between speed of flow of liquid with its pressure
A.
Hold a piece of paper. Blow air above the paper.

The paper will move ___________.

Which part of the paper has a:
Lower pressure?______________
Higher pressure?______________
Which part of the paper does the air move at a high speed? _________________
Mark the direction of the net force acted on the paper

B. Hold two pieces of paper close to each other and blow steadily into the space between the paper

FIZIKMOZAC

The papers will move __________________

Determine the regions which has:
Lower pressure: _______________
Higher pressure: _______________
Which part of the paper does the air move at a high speed? __________________
Mark the direction of the net force acted on the paper.

1. The movements of paper in both activities are caused by ______________ forces.

2. The force that caused the movement of paper is produced by the difference in __________ on both sides
of the paper.
3. Since the blown air is moving faster than the still air, the activity shows that pressure of fast flowing air
__________.
4. The relationship between the speed of air and pressure:

When the speed of air increases, the pressure of the air _____________
State Bernoullis Principle

Activity 2:

FIZIKMOZAC

Mark the water level in the vertical tubes P,Q and R in the following figures.

Activity 3: More activity

1. Try to float the ping pong ball over the straw. Why does the ping pong ball floats over the top of the
straw?

FIZIKMOZAC

..

2.

Suspend two balloons

through the space
happens to the two balloons? Why?

by two threads at a distance of 10 cm apart. Blow

between the balloons with the help of a straw. What

..
3. A filter funnel is connected to a water tap by using a rubber tube.

The tap is turned on to allow water to flow through the filter funnel. A ping pong ball is placed inside the
filter funnel amidst the stream of water flow.
What happens to the ping pong ball?
Explain.

.
Applications of Bernoullis Principle
1.

An aerofoil
(b) An aerofoil is a curved wing used to produce a lift (upwards force).

Draw the stream of airflow past on the aerofoil.

Label the region with faster airflow and slower airflow.

FIZIKMOZAC

Label the region with high pressure and lower pressure

Indicate and label the direction of the uplift force acts on the aerofoil
Explain how the uplift force is produced to help the plane take-off.

The airflow lines are _________ above the aerofoil because the air speed past the aerofoil is
___________.

The airflow above the aerofoil is_________ than the airflow below it, so there is _______ air pressure
above the aerofoil.

The pressure __________ between the air below and above the aerofoil produces an upward resultant
force known as a _______

2.

An Insecticide Spray

3.

A Bunsen Burner

4.

When the piston is pushed into the cylinder, air gusts out at _______ speed through the narrow
opening.
This produces a ______ pressure region around the opening.
The air above the insecticide is at atmospheric pressure which is ________, so it _________ the
insecticide to rise through the metal tube.
The mixture of insecticide and air is then ejected as a spray of small _________ of insecticide.

When a Bunsen burner is connected to the gas supply, gas gusts out through the jet with ________
speed.
This creates a region where a _______ pressure exists round the jet.
The outside air at __________ pressure which is _______ is sucked into the low pressure region.
The mixture of ______ and air which enters the barrel is then burnt to produce a flame.

Sports : ping pong, baseball, tennis, football

The figure shows a motion a ball when it is kicked by a football player from one corner of a field. The ball
is found to be spinning and swerving before entering the goal mouth. The ball moves in a curve because
of Bernoullis principle.

FIZIKMOZAC

5.

A Carburetor

A carburetor is used to produce a mixture of __________ and air which can be burnt easily in the
engine of a car.
Air flowing at a ________ speed through the narrow section causes the air pressure there to become
_________.
The __________ pressure pushes the petrol from the tank to flow out through the jet as spray of
petrol vapour after mixing with air.
The stream of air moves faster on one side of the spinning ball and the pressure on that side is
_________. A __________ force pushes the ball to one side as it moves forward.

Tutorial 3.6
1.

A.
B.
C.

The diagram shows a ping-pong ball that does not fall when the water flows.

Which principle explains the diagram? (2004)

Pascals principle
Bernoullis principle
Archimedes principle
2.

Diagram below shows two similar ping-pong balls suspended on strings of the same length.

FIZIKMOZAC

Which of the following diagrams shows the condition of the ping-pong balls when air is blown between
them? (2007)

3.

The figure shows water rising up the tubes X,Y and Z if the air is blown.

Which of the following is true regarding the water level in tube X,Y and Z?
A
Water level in X < Water level in Y < Water level in Z
B
Water level in X < Water level in Z < Water level in Y
C
Water level in Z < Water level in Y < Water level in X
D
Water level in Y < Water level in Z < Water level in X
4.

The figure shows the wing of an airplane which is moving with a uniform acceleration in the direction
shown by the arrow.

A
B
C
D

Which of the following is true?

The uplift force is higher than the weight of object
The resultant force in direction of the motion of the object is zero
The pressure in region P is higher than in region Q
The velocity of air in region P is higher than in region Q.

7. The figure shows a water spray that is produced when the air flows through the jet.

Which of the following is true?

A
According to Pascals Principle ,the that above system produces a water spray.
B
The air pressure at Q is higher than that at P

FIZIKMOZAC

8.

A.
B.
C.
D.

The velocity of air at Q is higher than that at P

Diagram 11 shows the roof of a house being lifted by strong winds.

Which explains the above principle? (2008)

Pascals Principle
Bernoullis Principle
Archimedes Principle
Newtons First Law
9.

Diagram 13 shows an object with an aerofoil shape placed in a wind tunnel.

Which position A, B, C and D experiences the lowest pressure?(2010)

10. Diagram 9 shows a piece of paper clamped to a retort stand.

When air at high velocity is blown on top of the paper, the edge of the paper (2011)

FIZIKMOZAC

A.
B.
C.

Will lift up
Will move down
Does not move
11. Diagram 12 shows a student blows strongly between two candle flames.

Why the candle flames approach one another when being blown? (2011)
A. Temperature between the candle flames becomes low
B. Pressure between the candle flames become low
C. Exist a vacuum area between the candle flames
D. Hot air at the bottom of the candles rises.
12. Diagram 10 shows a boy blowing over a glass rod.

A.
B.
C.
D.

Which principle explains the situation? (2012)

Pascals principle
Bernoullis principle
Archimedes principle
Principle of conservation of momentum
PAPER 2 SECTION A
SPM 2005 Paper 2 A5
Figure(a) shows a piece of paper hanging from a retort stand. When air flows from the nozzle of an air pump,
the paper changes its position as shown in Figure(b).

Figure(a)
Figure(b)
(b) Compare the position of paper in Figure(a) and Figure(b)
___________________________________
__________________________________

FIZIKMOZAC

(c) F is a force that causes the paper to change its position.

In box, X, on Figure(b) , indicate and label the direction of F that acts on the paper.
(c) Explain how F is produced?
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
[2 m]
(d) (i)

Compared to the position

of the paper in Figure(b), how does the position of the paper change when the air flows faster?
[1 mark]
____________________________________
____________________________________
(ii) Give reason to your answer in d(i).
____________________________________

(e)

[1 m]

Name the principle that causes the the observations in Figure(b)

_______________________________________
[1 m]

(f)

Name one piece of apparatus in a school laboratory which uses the principle in(e).
_______________________________________
[1 m]

2. Spm 2006 Question No. 5:

Diagram 20.1 shows the situations of a sheet of paper before and when air is blown. Diagram 20.2 shows the
situation of the canopy before the lorry moves and when the lorry moves at high speed.

(a) What is meant by speed?

[1 mark]

__________________________ _____________
(b) Based on Diagram 20.1 and Diagram 20.2:
(i)
State two similarities for the situations in Diagram 20.1 and Diagram 20.2.
___________________________________

FIZIKMOZAC

___________________________________
[2 m]
(ii)

Compare the air pressure above and below the paper when air is blown.
___________________________________
[1]

(iii)

Relate the speed of the air to the pressure of the air.

____________________________________
[1]

(c) Name the principle involved in 5(b)(iii).

___________________________________
[1]
(d) Diagram 20.3 shows an instrument used to measure the speed of air.

Diagram 20.2
In Diagram 20.3, the levels of coloured water in the U-tube are the same before air flows.
(i)
Compare the speeds of air at P and at Q
____________________________
[1]
(ii)

Mark the water levels in the U-tube in Diagram 5.3 while air flows.
[1]

FIZIKMOZAC

PAPER 2: Essay questions

1. SPM 2005 (section B)
A fisherman finds that his boat is at different levels in the sea and in the river, although the boat carries the
same load. The density of sea water 1 025 kg m-3 and of river water is 1 000 kg m-3. Figure (a) and Figure
(b) illustrate the situation of the boat in the sea and in the river.

(i)

What is meant by density?

...................................................................................
[1 mark]
(ii) Using Figure(a) and Figure(b) ,
compare the levels of the boat and the volumes of water displaced by the boat. Relating the mass of the
boat with its load, the volume of water displaced and the density of the water , deduce a relevant physics
concept.
....................................................................................
..................................................................................
..................................................................................
.................................................................................
...................................................................................
(iii)

Name the physics principle that explains the above situations.

...................................................................................
(b) A submarine can sail on the sea surface and under the sea. Explain how a submarine on the surface
submerges.
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
.................................................................................
(c) Figure(c) and Figure (d) illustrate the working principle of a hydrometer. The depth to which the test tube
sinks depends on its surrounding liquid.

FIZIKMOZAC

Figure(c)

Figure(d)

Explain how you would design a hydrometer that can determine a wide range of densities of liquid, using the
idea of the working principle of a hydrometer shown above. Draw a diagram that shows the design of your
hydrometer and in your explanation, emphasise the following aspects:
(i)the stability of the hydrometer
(ii)
the sensitivity of the hydrometer
(iii)
the ability to measure a wide range of densities of liquids
(iv)
the calibration of the hydrometer

2. SPM 2007 (Essay Section B)

(a) Diagram 9.1 shows a cross section of a wing of a moving aeroplane. The wing of the aeroplane
experiences a lift force.

FIZIKMOZAC

(i)

Name the shape of the cross-section in Diagram 9.1.

.....................................................................................

(ii)

Explain why the lift force acts on the wing of the aeroplane.

......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................

(b) Two ski jumpers ski down from a very high platform with the same take off velocity. Diagram 9.2 and
Diagram 9.3 show the posture of the two ski jumpers during take off from the platform. Diagram 9.4
and Diagram 9.5 show the posture of the two ski jumpers in the air. They land on the ground at the
same instant.

(i)

Based on Diagram 9.2 and Diagram 9.3, compare the posture of the two ski jumpers.
[1 mark]

......................................................................................
(ii)

Based on Diagram 9.4 and Diagram 9.5, compare the landing distance of the two ski jumpers.
[1 mark]

......................................................................................
(iii)

Based on Diagram 9.4 and Diagram 9.5, relate the lift force to the landing distance.
marks]

[2

..................................................................................
................................................................ ..
(iv)

Name one spot which uses the same principle of lift force as the ski jumper. Explain the
similarities.
[2 marks]

.....................................................................................
....................................................................................
(c) Diagram 9.6 shows a sailboat.

FIZIKMOZAC

You are required to give some suggestions to design a sailboat which can travel faster. Using the knowledge
on motion, forces and the properties of materials, explain the suggestions based on the following aspects:
(i)
the surface of the board
(ii)
the shape of the board
(iii)
material used for the board
(iv)
material used for the sail
(v)
the size of the tail
[10 marks]

3. SPM 2009 No. 9

Diagram 9.1 shows the effect of pressure on a sandy beach when a man sits on a chair. Diagram 9.2 shows
the same man sitting on the same chair after a piece of plank is placed under the chair.

(a) (i) What is the meaning of pressure?[1 mark]

......................................................................................
(ii)

Observe Diagram 9.1 and Diagram 9.2. Compare the depth of sinking, the load and the area of contact
with the sandy beach.

FIZIKMOZAC

Relate the depth of sinking with the pressure exerted by the chair to make a deduction on the
relationship between the pressure and the area of contact in this situation.
[5
marks]
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
(b) Diagram 9.3 shows a vacuum cleaner.

Explain how the vacuum cleaner is able to remove dust from the floor.

[4 marks]

......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
(c) A car needs an efficient hydraulic brake system for safety purposes.
Suggest and explain how to build a hydraulic brake system which can function effectively, based on the
following aspect:
(i) The type and characteristics of the brake fluid.
(ii) The size of the master piston and slave piston.
(iii)
The material used for the fluid transmission pipe.
[10 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

4. SPM 2010 Section B

Diagram 9.1 shows a boy and his father sitting on two identical beach balls, A and B, respectively.

Their weights are balanced by the buoyant force.

(a) What is the meaning of weight?
[1 mark]
......................................................................................
(b)

(i) Using Diagram 9.1, compare the weight of the boy and his father, the volume of the water displaced
and the buoyant force acted on both of them.
[3 marks]

......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
(ii)

State the relationship between the buoyant force and:

The volume of water displaced
The weight of water displaced
[2 marks]

.....................................................................................
......................................................................................
(iii) Name the physics principle involved.
......................................................................................
[1 mark]
(c) Diagram 9.2 shows what happens when a wooden block is held above the water surface and then
released into the water.

When the wooden block is released, it falls into the water and goes completely under the water surface.
Then it moves upwards and floats on the water surface.

FIZIKMOZAC

Using the concept of buoyant force, explain why the wooden block moves upwards and then floats on the
water surface.
[3 marks]
....................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
(d) The State Forestry Department is going to organize a raft competition. As a team leader, you are
required to give some suggestions to design a raft which can accommodate 15 participants and be able
to move quickly in water.
Using your knowledge of motion, forces and properties of materials, state and explain the suggestions,
based on the following aspects:
(i) The shape of the raft
[2 marks]
(ii) The material used for the raft [2 marks]
(iii) The size of the raft
[2 marks]
(iv) The design of the raft.
[4 marks]

5. Spm 2012 Section B

Diagram 9.1 shows the positions P and Q at different altitude.

Two identical simple barometers are placed at both positions. The height of the mercury column in the
barometers are shown in Diagram 9.2.

FIZIKMOZAC

The density of air at P is 1.2 kgm-3 and the density of air at Q is 1.0 kgm-3
(a) What is the meaning of density?

[1 mark]
(b) Using Diagram 9.1 and Diagram 9.2, compare the altitudes of P and Q, the density of surrounding air
and the height of mercury column in the simple barometer at positions P and Q.
[3 marks]

(c) State the relationship between the altitude and

(i)
The density of the air
(ii)
The atmospheric pressure
[2 marks]

(d) Diagram 9.3 shows a dropper in a bottle.

Using the knowledge of atmospheric pressure, explain how the liquid in the bottle can be sucked into the
dropper tube.
[4 marks]

....

FIZIKMOZAC

(e) Diagram 9.4 shows a vacuum cleaner.

You are required to give some suggestions to design a vacuum cleaner which can clean the dust faster
and effectively. Using the knowledge on atmospheric pressure, Bernoullis principle and properties of
materials, explain your suggestion based on the following aspects:
(i)
Material used for the body of vacuum cleaner.
(ii)
Material used for the hose
(iii)
The size of the fan
(iv)
The size of the floor nozzle
(v)
The diameter of wand
[10 marks]

6. SPM 2011 Section C

(a) Diagram 11.1 shows a hydraulic jack which is used to lift up a car. The working principle of the hydraulic
jack is based on the Pascal's principle.

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 11.1
(i)

State the Pascal's principle.

................................................................
[1 mark]
(ii) Explain how the hydraulic jack can be used to lift a car when force F1 is applied on the small piston with
cross-section area Al. In your explanation, state the reason why force F2 is greater than force F1.
[4 marks]
.
.
..
.
(b) Diagram 11.2 shows a hydraulic brake system in a car.

Diagram 11.2
You are required to investigate the characteristics of a hydraulic brake system as shown in Table 11.
Hydraul
Type of
ic
brake fluid
brake
Jenis
Brek

J
K
L

Incompress
able
Compress
able
Incompress

Boiling
Spring Ratio of crosspoint of constant
section
brake
of
area of
fluid
the spring pistons in the
master
cylinder to the
brake drum
cylinder

Low

Low

1:1

Low

High

5: 1

High

High

1: 5

FIZIKMOZAC

able
Compress
able

High

Low

3:2

Table 11
Explain the suitability of each characteristic of the hydraulic brake system. Determine the most effective
hydraulic brake to be used in a car brake system. Give reasons for your choice. [10 marks]

(c) In a hydraulic brake system, the cross-section area of the pistons in the master cylinder and the front
wheel are 2 cm2 and 6 cm2 respectively. A force of 50 N is applied to the piston in the master cylinder.
Calculate
(i) the pressure transmitted throughout the brake fluid.[2 marks]
(ii) the force exerted on the piston of the front wheel.
[3 marks]

PAPER 3 SECTION A
Question 1 SPM 2009
A student carries out an experiment to investigate the relationship between the mass, m, of a material and its
volume, V. A slotted weight of mass 50.0 g is gently immersed into a measuring cylinder containing water.
The arrangement of the apparatus for this experiment is shown in Diagram 1.1.

Diagram 1.1
Diagram 1.2 shows the initial water level, V0 in the measuring cylinder before the slotted weight is immersed
in it.

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 1.2
Diagram 1.3 shows the water leer in the measuring cylinder when a 50.0 g slotted weight is immersed in it.

The procedure is repeated with masses, m = 100.0 g, 150.0 g, 200.0 g and 250.0 g. The corresponding water
levels in the measuring cylinder are shown in Diagrams 1.4, 1.5, 1.6 and 1.7.

Diagram 1.4

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 1.5

Diagram 1.6

Diagram 1.7
(a)

For the experiment described, identify:

(i)Manipulated variable: .
(ii(The responding variable:
(iii)The constant variable:

(b)

For this part of the question, write your answers in the spaces provided in the
corresponding diagrams.

FIZIKMOZAC

(i) Based on Diagram 1.2 , record the reading of, V0

[1 mark]
(ii) Based on Diagram 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6 and 1.7 record the readings of V1
[1 mark]
(iii) Calculate V for each of V1 in 1(b)(ii), using the formula V = (V1 V0 ). Record the value of V.
[1 mark]
(c)

Tabulate your results for all values of m, V1 and V in the space below.

(d)
(e)

On a piece of graph paper, plot a graph of V against m.

Based on the graph in 1(d), state the relationship between V and m.

FIZIKMOZAC

2.

Question 1 SPM 2011

A student carries out an experiment to investigate

the relationship between the depth of immersion,

FIZIKMOZAC

d, of a cylinder steel rod and the buoyant force,

FB. The apparatus set-up for this experiment is
shown in Diagram 1.1. The reading of the spring
balance, WO is 10.0 N

Diagram 2.3
Diagram 2.1
The rod is immersed into a beaker of water.
Diagram 2.2 shows the reading of the spring
balance, W, when the rod is immersed to a depth,
d = 5.0 cm. the experiment is repeated with the
immersion depths of d = 10.0 cm, 15.0 cm, 20.0 cm
and 25.0 cm. The corresponding readings of the
spring balance are shown in Diagram 2.3, 2.4, 2.5
and 2.6.

Diagram 2.4

Diagram 2.2

Diagram 2.5

FIZIKMOZAC

(d) On a piece of graph paper, draw a graph of FB

against d.
[5 marks]
(e) Based on the graph in 2(d), state the
relationship between FB and d.
Diagram 2.6
(a) For the experiment described, identify:
(i)The manipulated variable:
(ii)The responding variable: .
(iii)The constant variable: .
Write your answers for question 2(b) in the spaces
provided in Diagram 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5 and 2.6. Your
answers must be in one decimal place.
(b) Based on Diagram 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5 and 2.6:
(i)Record the readings, W, of the spring
balance.
[2 marks]
(ii)For each value of W in 2(b)(i), calculate the
buoyant force, FB acting on the rod by using
the following equation
FB = W O W
Record the value of FB .
[2 marks]
(c) Tabulate your results for all values of d, W
and FB in the space below.
[3 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

3.

Question 2, SPM 2012

A student carries out an experiment to investigate

the relationship between the loss in weight, W, of

FIZIKMOZAC

an object immersed in water and the volume of

the water displaced, V. In this experiment, an
object is hung on a spring balance is immersed
into a eureka can filled with water. The result of
the experiment is shown in the graph of W against
V.

WO = .. N
(e) State one precaution that should be taken to
improve the result of this experiment.

[1 mark]
PAPER 3 SECTION B
Based on the diagrams in Questions:
(a)
make one suitable inference
(b)
state one appropriate
hypothesis that could be
investigated.
(c)
describe how you would design an
experiment to test your hypothesis
In your explanation, state clearly the
following :
(ii)
aim of the experiment
(iii)
variables in the experiment
(iv)
list of apparatus and materials
(v)
arrangement of the apparatus
(vi)
the procedures of the experiment, which
includes the method of controlling the
manipulated variable and the method of
measuring the responding variable
(vii)
the way you would tabulate the data
(viii)
the way you would analyse the data
[12 marks]
1. SPM 08
Diagram 3.1 and 3.2 show a worker pushing a
wheelbarrow on soft ground. He noticed that the
tyre sinks deeper into the ground when the
wheelbarrow is loaded.

(a) Based on the graph in Diagram 2.1:

(i)State the relationship between W and V.

[1 mark]
(ii)Determine the value of W when V = 3.5 cm3.
Show on the graph, how you determine the value
of W.
W =
[2 marks]
(b) Calculate the gradient, k, of the graph W
against V. Show on the graph how you
determine the value of k.
k = .

[3 marks]

(c) The density of the water, , in g cm-3 is

calculated using the formula = 100k/g
where g = 10 ms-2. Use your graph to
determine the density of water.
= g cm-3
[2 marks]
(d) Based on the graph, determine the loss in
weight , WO, of an object that displaces 70
cm3 of water when immersed in the eureka
can. Show on the graph how you obtain
your answer.
[3 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

2.

Figure 3 shows the cross-section of a

dam. The wall has to be thicker at the
bottom of the dam.
3.

The diagram 3.1 and 3.2 show a diver

swimming in the sea and in fresh water.
The diver experiences more discomfort to
his body and ear in Diagram 3.1.

FIZIKMOZAC

It becomes more difficult to pull out the

fish out of the water and the rod is getting
bender in Diagram 3.2.

4.

A man who is fishing, pulled out a fish

out of the water as shown in Diagram 3.1.

FIZIKMOZAC

LEARNING OUTCOMES
4.1 UNDERSTANDING THERMAL
EQUILIBRIUM
By the end of this subtopic, you
will be able to

Explain thermal equilibrium

Explain how a liquid in-glass

thermometer works.

4.2 UNDERSTANDING SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY

By the end of this subtopic, you will be able to

Define specific heat capacity

State that c = Q/m

Determine the specific heat capacity of a liquid

Determine the specific heat capacity of a solid

Describe applications of specific heat capacity

Solve problems involving specific heat capacity

4.3 UNDERSTANDING SPECIFIC LATENT HEAT

By the end of this subtopic, you will be able to

State that transfer of heat during a change

of phase does not cause a change in
temperature

Define specific latent heat, (l)

State that l = Q/m

Determine the specific latent heat of fusion

Determine the specific latent heat of

vaporization

Solve problems involving specific latent

heat.

4.3 UNDERSTANDING THE GAS LAW

By the end of this subtopic, you will be able to

Explain gas pressure, temperature and

volume in terms of the behavior of gas
molecules

Determine the relationship between:

(i)
Pressure and volume
(ii)
Volume and temperature
(iii)
Pressure and temperature

Explain absolute zero

Explain the absolute/Kelvin scale of

temperature

Solve problems involving pressure,

temperature and volume of a fixed mass of
gas

FIZIKMOZAC

4.1
Activity 2: To observe the changes in temperature
when two objects come into thermal
contact
Getting Idea of heat transfer

Material : Hot water, tap water, 250 ml beaker,

plastic basin, two thermometers, two
retort stands with clamps

The boy takes his

hand away from
the kettle
because the boy
feels the heat of
the kettle. Heat is
transferred from
the kettle to the
boys hand.

Procedure:
1. Fill the beaker with hot water.
2. Place the beaker of hot water into a basin
containing tap water.
3. Observe the temperature changes in the hot
water and tap water using the thermometers.
4. After about 10 minutes, feel the hotness of

The ice melt

when it is in the
boys hand. The
boys hand is
cooled. Heat is
transferred from
the boys hand to
the ice.
Heat is transferred from hot object to cold object.
Activity 1: Comparison between Temperature and
Heat
Characteristic
Definition

Temperature
Temperature is
the degree of
____________
of an object.

Heat
Heat is the
amount of
_________ that
can be
transferred from
_________objec
t to a _______
object.

5.
6.

Discussion:
1. What do a rise and fall of temperature of the
water indicate?
_______________________________________
_______________________________________

Unit SI
Measurement
instrument
Base / derived
quantity?
Scalar / vector
quantity

Joulemeter or
calorimeter

the water in the beaker and basin with your

finger.
Continue your observation until there is no
change in the readings of the thermometers.
Record your observations.

2.

Discuss the transfer of energy between the

water in the beaker and the water in the basin.
_______________________________________

When an object is heated, it will ___________

heat energy and the temperature will _______

When an object is cooled, it will ___________

heat energy and the temperature will _______

3.

What can you say about the rates of transfer

of energy when the readings of the two
thermometers become equal?

_______________________________________
Thermal Equilibrium
Block A is hot and block B is at room temperature.
What will happen if the two blocks are in direct
physical contact?

FIZIKMOZAC

thermal equilibrium is reached. The towel is

rinsed in tap water and the procedure is
repeated. In this way heat energy is removed
from the person.

Heat energy is transferred at a __________

rate from the hot objects A to the cold object
B.
Heat is transferred at a __________ rate from
the cold object B to the hot object A.

What happens to the temperature of the blocks?

Why?
The hot object A _________ heat while the
cold object B ________ heat.
The temperature of block A __________, the
temperature of block B ____________
Heat transferred to B ___________ the kinetic
energy of its molecules
The net result is the transfer of heat energy from
the _______ object to the _________ object.
What happens to rate of heat transfer after
sometimes?

After sometimes, heat is transferred at the

same rate between the two blocks.
The net rate of heat transferred between the
two object becomes _______
The temperature of block A _________ to the
temperature of block B.
The molecules of both objects have the same
__________ energy.
The two objects are said to be in __________
______.

Explain Thermal Equilibrium

2. Cooling drinks
A hot drink can be cooled by adding a few ice
cubes to the drink. Heat from the hot drink is
transferred to the colder ice until thermal
equilibrium between the ice and water is reached.
The final temperature of the drink equal the final
temperature of ices.
Explain how a liquid-in-glass thermometer works.
A doctor uses a thermometer
to measure a patients body
temperature. There is a
difference in temperature
before and after the
measurement. Why?
The thermometer is placed
in the patients ________
There is a ______ flow from the patient to the
thermometer.
This will happens until ___________
____________ is achieved.
The patients body temperature and the
thermometer temperature are ____________.
Temperature is measured using a liquid-inglass thermometer. The bulbs contains a
fixed mass of liquid such as ___________.
The volume of the liquid increases when it
absorbs heat.
The liquid ___________ and rises in the
capillary tube.
Therefore the length of the liquid column in
the capillary tube indicates the magnitude of
the temperature.
How a thermometer is calibrated?
A scale and unit of temperature are obtained
by choosing two temperatures or fixed points.

Fixed
point
Lower point,
ice point
Upper point,
Steam point

Example of thermal equilibrium

1. A wet towel is placed on the forehead of a
person who has high fever. Initially the
temperature of the cloth is lower than the body
temperature of the person. Heat energy is
transferred from the forehead to the towel until

The range between the fixed points is divided

into 100 equal divisions and each division
equal 1 C. The thermometer is calibrated
and ready for use

Definition

FIZIKMOZAC

Example 1:

Give three characteristics of mercury that makes

it suitable as a liquid in liquid-in-glass
thermometer.
___________________________________________
___________________________________________
___________________________________________
TUTORIAL 4.1
1. Which of the following is true?
A. The unit of heat is o C
B. Heat is a form of energy
C. Heat flows from a cold substance to a hot substance.
2.

A boy puts some ice cubes in his orange juice. There is energy transferred between the ice cube and the
juice. Which of the following properties determines the direction of such exchange?
A. Density
B. Temperature
C. State of matter
D. Specific Heat Capacity

3.

The diagram shows two bodies P and Q which are in thermal equilibrium.
Which of the following statements is not true?
A. The net rate of heat flow is zero
B. The heat flow in both directions is the same.
C. The final temperature of both bodies is the same.
D. The final physical characteristics of both bodies are the same.

4.

An earth-monitoring satellite falls into the earths atmosphere at a high velocity and reaches at the sea
surface with a high temperature. After a while the temperature of the satellite is same as the
temperature of the sea water. This is caused by
A. The heat released by the satellite
B. The heat absorbed by the sea water
C. The satellite is cooled by the sea water
D. The satellite and the sea water are in thermal equilibrium

5.

The diagram shows a metal sphere P at 80oC is immersed in a cooler liquid Q.

FIZIKMOZAC

Thermal equilibrium is reached when

A. temperature of P = temperature of Q
B. mass of Q displaced = mass of P
C. volume of Q = volume of P
D. specific heat capacity of P = specific heat capacity of Q
6.

The diagram shows two copper blocks, L and M, touching each other. The initial temperatures of L and
M are 50 oC and 30 oC respectively.

Which statement is correct when L and M are at thermal equilibrium?

A. Temperature of L is higher than M
B. The quantity of heat in L is the same as in M
C. Rate of change in temperature of L is bigger than that of M
D. Net rate of heat flow between L and M is zero
7.

The diagram shows object A and object B are of temperatures T1 and T2. The heat flows from A to B until
the thermal equilibrium is reached at a temperature T.

Which relationship between T1 , T2 and T is true?

A T1 > T 2 > T
B T2 > T 1 > T
C T1 > T > T 2
D T2 > T > T 1
7.

What is the concept used in the measurement of human body temperature using a thermometer? (2007)
A. Specific heat capacity
B. Specific latent heat
C. Thermal equilibrium
D. Thermal convection

9.

Diagram 12 shows a metal sphere at temperature of 90C immersed in a liquid at temperature of 40C.

FIZIKMOZAC

What is the temperature of the metal sphere when thermal equilibrium is achieved between the sphere
and the liquid?(2006)
A. More than 90 C
B. Same as room temperature
C. Less than 40 C
D. Between 40 C and 90C
10. Diagram 11 shows hot water being added to cold water.

Which of the following statements is correct if there are no heat losses to the surrounding? (2007)
A. Heat lost by hot water is greater than heat gained by cold water.
B. Heat lost by hot water is greater than heat gained by cold water.
C. Heat lost by hot water is equal to heat gained by cold water.
11. Diagram 12.1 shows hot water being poured into cold syrup. Diagram 12.2 shows the final mixture.

Which statement is correct about the temperature of the final mixture? (2008)
A. It is lower than the temperature of the cold syrup
B. It is lower than the temperature of the hot water
C. It is higher than the temperature of the hot water
D. It is the same as the temperature of the cold syrup.
12. Diagram 10 shows a cup of hot coffee.

What happens when the coffee and the cup are in thermal equilibrium? (2009)

FIZIKMOZAC

A.
B.
C.
D.

The temperature of the cup is increasing

The temperature of the coffee is decreasing
There is no net heat flow from the coffee to the cup
There is a net flow from the coffee to the cup

13. Which of the following points are used in the calibration of a thermometer?
A. Melting point of ice and freezing point of ice.
B. Melting point of ice and boiling point of water.
C. Boiling point of water and condensation point of water.
D. Melting point of ice and condensation point of water.
14.

The lengths of the mercury column in a thermometer at the ice point and the steam point are 5 cm
and 25 cm respectively. When the thermometer is placed in a liquid , the length of the mercury column is
12 cm. What is the temperature of the liquid?
A 30 o C
B 35 o C
C 55 o C
D 70 o C
E 85o C

15. Which liquid A , B, C or D , can be used to make a liquid in-glass thermometer to measure temperatures
from -50o C to 50o C?
Freezing
Boiling
point /oC
point /oC
A
-115
78
B
-39
357
C
0
100
D
17
118
16. The diagram shows a thermometer.

Which modification will increase the sensitivity of the thermometer?

A. Using a longer capillary tube
B. Using a bulb with a thicker wall
C. Using a glass stem with a thicker wall
D. Using a narrower bore of capillary tube
17. Mercury is used in the thermometer because it
A. sticks to the glass
B. has a lower boiling point
C. expands and contracts uniformly
D. is transparent and therefore it is easier to read.
18. A cake is placed in a hot oven. The temperature of the cake is the same as that of the oven after several
minutes. Which concept explains the situation?(2012)
A. Specific latent heat of vaporization
B. Specific latent heat of fusion
C. Specific heat capacity
D. Thermal equilibrium
1.The figure shows a mercury thermometer.

(a) Name component

P: __________________

Q: ________________

FIZIKMOZAC

(b) (i) State the physical change in the mercury when the temperature increases.
__________________________________
(ii) Why is mercury used in the thermometer?
__________________________________
(c)

The length of the mercury column in the thermometer is 2.6 cm at 0C and 22.6 cm at 100 C?
(i) What is the difference in the lengths of the mercury columns at 0 C and at 100 C?
___________________________________
(ii) When the thermometer is placed in hot oil, the length of the mercury column is 16.9 cm. Calculate
the temperature of the hot oil.

4.2

Idea of Heat Capacity

A pail of water from a swimming pool has been left for several hours beside the pool. Which is hotter? The
water in the _______ is hotter. The water in the swimming pool has a ________ mass.
The water in the _______ needs to be exposed to the sunlight in a shorter time in order to raise its
temperature by 1 C.
Inference:
A body with a ____________ mass requires more heat to raise its temperature by 1 C.
Heat Capacity of a body is the amount of ______ that must be supplied to the body to increase its
_____________ by 1 C.
Which has the larger heat capacity?
___ water in the pail

___ water in the swimming

pool

The heat capacity of an object depends on the:

(a) _______ of the object: An object with a larger mass will have a __________ heat capacity than an object
with smaller mass of the same material
(b)

______ of material: Different materials have different heat capacities.

Diagram below shows the amount of heat supplied and the increase of temperature in three metal blocks.
The three objects have different heat capacities because different amounts of heat are required to raise their
temperature by 1 C.

FIZIKMOZAC

Aluminium block B has a higher heat capacity than aluminium block A because B has a larger _______.
Note that although A and B are both made of aluminium, they have different heat capacities becauses the
________ are different.

The aluminium block A and lead block C have equal mass but more heat is required to produce a 1 C
increase in temperature for the block __________.

_____ J of heat needs to be supplied to 1 kg of aluminium to produce a 1 C temperature increase.

_____ J of heat needs to be supplied to 1 kg of lead to produce a 1 C temperature increase.

Note that although A and C have equal masses, different amounts of heat are required to raise the
temperature by 1 C because they are made of different ________

Different materials are said to have different specific heat capacities.

Define Specific Heat Capacity

Symbol

Q
c
m

Physical
Quantity

Unit

Q
m

The quantity of heat absorbed or lost by an object is

Q = mc

Exercise 1
1. What does it mean by specific heat capacity of aluminium is 900 J kg -1 C-1?
___________________________________________
___________________________________________

FIZIKMOZAC

2.

What does it mean by specific heat capacity of water is 4 200 J kg-1 C-1?

___________________________________________
___________________________________________
3.

A metal of mass 2 kg. Calculate the amount of heat that must be transferred to the metal to raise the
temperature from 30 oC to 70 oC.
(specific capacity of the metal = 500 J kg -1 o C-1 )

4.

How many joules of energy are required to raise the temperature of 100 g of gold from 20 C to 100 C?
( specific heat capacity of gold is 129 J kg-1 C-1)

5.

The same quantity of heat is used to heat different masses of three substance A, B and C. The
temperature rise in each case is shown in the table. Calculate the specific heat capacities of A, B and C.
Mate Mass /
Heat
Temp. c / J kg1
rial
kg
given /
rise /
C-1
J
C
A
1.0
2 000
1.0

6.

2.0

2 000

5.0

0.5

2 000

4.0

A lady takes a watermelon and sandwich from the fridge and leaves them outside. After sometimes she
touches the watermelon and sandwich, she feels the watermelon is cooler than the sandwich. Why does
the watermelon stay cool for a longer time than the sandwich even though both are taken from the same
fridge?

__________________________________________
Activity 2: Determining specific heat capacity of a solid (Aluminium)
Material : Aluminium cylinder, felt cloth, asbestos sheet, a small amount of oil
Apparatus: Immersion heater, thermometer, power supply, stopwatch
Procedure
The set up of the apparatus is as shown in Diagram below.

FIZIKMOZAC

The electrical power of the heater is recorded = P

The mass of the aluminium cylinder is recorded = m
The initial temperature of the aluminium is read off the thermometer = 1
The electric heater is switched on and the stopwatch is started simultaneously.
The heater is switched off after heating for a time , t ,
The maximum reading on the thermometer is recorded = 2
Calculate the temperature increase,
Calculate the heat supplied by the heater = Pt
The heat absorbed by the aluminum cylinder
= Q = mc

On the assumption that there is no heat loss to surroundings;,

Pt = mc , calculate the specific heat capacity of aluminium.

Discussion
1. What are the uses and purposes of the asbestos sheet, felt cloth and oil in this activity?
___________________________________________
2.

Do you expect the value of the specific heat capacity obtained in this activity to be smaller or larger than
the standard value given in the textbook? Explain your answer.

___________________________________________
___________________________________________
Activity 3: Determining specific heat capacity of a liquid (water)
Material : polystyrene cup containing water
Apparatus: Immersion heater, thermometer, power supply, stopwatch, stirrer, triple beam balance
Procedure
The set up of the apparatus is as shown in Diagram below.

FIZIKMOZAC

The electrical power of the heater is

recorded = P
The empty beaker is weighed and its
mass is recorded = m1
The beaker is filled with water and
the beaker is weighed again and it
mass is recorded = m2
The mass of water, = m
The initial temperature of the water is
read off the thermometer = 1
The electric heater is switched on
and the stopwatch is started
simultaneously.
The heater is switched off ,after
heating for a time , t ,
The maximum reading on the
thermometer is recorded = 2
Calculate the temperature increase,
Calculate the heat supplied by the heater = Pt
the heat absorbed by the water = ( m2 - m1)c ( 2- 1)
On the assumption that there is no heat loss to
surroundings, calculate the specific heat capacity
of water:
Pt = ( m2 - m1)c ( 2- 1)

Discussion
1. Why is a polystyrene cup preferred to a glass beaker in this activity?
___________________________________________
2.

Do you expect the value of the specific heat capacity obtained in this activity to be smaller or larger than
the standard value given in the textbook? Explain your answer.

___________________________________________
__________________________________________
Conversion of energy

FIZIKMOZAC

Exercise 2: Solve problems involving specific heat capacity

1.

An electric kettle is rated 1 000 W. Calculate

(a) the quantity of heat generated in 5 minutes
(b) the rise in temperature of 750 g of water if the electric kettle is switched on for 5 minutes.(the
specific heat capacity of water is 4 200 J kg-1 C-1

2.

200 g of water with a temperature of 40 C is mixed with 800 g of boiling water. It there is no heat loss to
the surroundings, what is the final temperature when the mixture of water achieves thermal equilibrium?

3.

How long does it take for an immersion heater of 12 W to raise the temperature of 200 g of water by 5 C?
(the specific heat capacity of water is 4 200 J kg-1 C-1

4.

What is the specific heat capacity of metal X?

FIZIKMOZAC

5.

A lead bullet moving at a velocity of 200 ms-1 hits a sand bag. The temperature of the lead bullet rises by
50 C. Assuming that all the kinetic energy of the bullet is converted into heat energy that heats up the
bullet, calculate the specific heat capacity of the bullet.

6.

A lead ball of mass 320 g is dropped from a height of 12 m. the collision between the ball and the ground
is completely inelastic. Assuming all the energy of the ball goes into heating it, calculate the change in
temperature of the ball. (specific heat capacity of lead = 128 J kg-1 C-1 )

Applications of Specific Heat Capacity

Substance
with a
small
value of
specific
heat
capacity

1. Heats up and cools at a faster

rate.
For example, metal like iron, steel,
copper and aluminium is used as
pots and pans because they can
be quickly heated up when there is
only small heat absorption.
2.

Sensitive to temperature
changes
A thermometer has low specific
heat capacities so it enables heat
to be easily absorbed and released
even when small quantities of heat
are involved.
Substance
with a high
value of
specific
heat
capacity

1.

Heats up and cools at slower

rate.
Require more heat to raise its
temperature by a specific amount.
Poor conductor of heat handle of
pot
2.

Can absorb a great amount of

heat without a high increase in
temperature.
For example, water acts a heat
reservoir as it can absorb a great
amount of heat before it boils.
Water is used as a cooling agent in
a car radiator.

Cooking pot

FIZIKMOZAC

(a)

Copper base
_____ specific heat capacity. The pot becomes hot very quickly. This enables quick cooking of the food in
the pot.
______ density. The heavier base ensures that the pot is stable and will not topple over easily.

(b)

Wooden Handle
________ specific heat capacity. The handle will not become too hot when heat is absorbed.
Poor __________ of heat.

(c)

Alumni body
Relatively ______ specific heat capacity. The pot becomes hot quickly.
_______ density so it will be lighter
Does not react with the food in the pot

Sea Breeze

Land has a _________ specific heat capacity than sea. Faster increase in temperature, ie land is warmer
than the sea
Air above the _______ is heated up and rises.
Cooler air from the ________ moves from towards the land as sea br eeze.

Land Breeze

At night, heat is lost from the land and sea.

Sea has a larger specific heat capacity so sea is _________ than land.
_________ air above the sea rises
Cooler air from the land moves towards the sea as land breeze.

The cooling system of a car engine

FIZIKMOZAC

Water has a _______ specific heat capacity and _______ cost. So water can be a useful a cooling agent.
A water pump ___________ the water.
Heat produced by the engine is ___________ by the water that flows along the space in engine walls.
The hot water flows to the radiator where ____ is lost to the cooler air that flows through the cooling fans.
TUTORIAL 4.2
1. The specific heat capacity of aluminium is 900 J kg-1 C-1. Which statement explains the specific heat
capacity of aluminium correctly? (2009)
A. 1 kg of aluminium absorbs 900 J of heat energy during heating
B. The temperature of 1 kg of aluminium will rise by 1C when it absorbs 900 J of heat energy
C. The temperature of 1 kg of aluminium will drop by 1C when it absorbs 900 J of heat energy.
D. Aluminium requires 900 J of heat energy to increase its temperature by 1C.
2.

Water is used in a cooling system in a car engine. Why is water used as the cooling agent? (2008)
A. Water evaporates easily
B. Water is not corrosive
C. Water has a high density
D. Water can absorb a lot of heat

3.

Heat energy is supplied at the same rate to 0.4 kg of substance P and 0.4 kg of substance Q in similar
containers. The temperature of substance P rises faster.
This is because the substance P
A. is less dense than substance Q
B. is more dense than substance Q
C. evaporates less readily than substance Q
D. has a smaller specific heat capacity than substance Q

4.

The diagram shows solid blocks M and N of equal mass, which are being heated. The initial temperature
of M and N is the same and heated by the same amount of energy.

It
A.
B.
C.
D.

observed that M is hot faster than N. This observation is due to the difference in (2004)
density
melting point
latent heat of fusion
specific heat capacity

5.

Which of the following statements is the correct explanation for the formation of sea breeze?
A. Sea breeze blows during the night
B. Seawater is a better conductor of heat than the land
C. The density of seawater is greater than the density of the land
D. The specific heat capacity of the sea is greater than the specific heat capacity of the land

6.

P, Q, R and S are four different solids with the same mass. The table shows the specific heat capacity
and the melting point of each solid. The solids are at room temperature. If heat is supplied at the same
rate to each solid, which solid will be the first to melt?
Solid
Specific heat
Melting

FIZIKMOZAC

A
B
C
D

P
Q
R
S

capacity (Jkg-1C1
)
800
600
700
400

point
(C)
200
230
400
300

7.

A metal block is dropped from a height of 82 m. What is the rise in the temperature of the metal block
after it hits the ground?
(specific heat capacity of the metal block = 410 J kg -1oC-1 )
A 0.5 o C
B 1.0 o C
C 2.0 o C
D 4.0 o C
E 8.0 o C

A metal block is dropped from a height building. Which of the following is not the factor for the metal
block rise in temperature?
A. height of the building
B. mass of the metal block
C. acceleration due to the gravity
D. specific heat of the metal block

10. The value of the specific heat capacity, c of a substance determined from an experiment is larger than
the standard value of c.
A. the electric heater is overheating
B. the mass of the substance is decreased
C. the temperature rise , less than the expected temperature rise
11. Which of the following is true?

A
B
C
D

Specific heat
capacity of cooking
utensil
high
low
high
low

Specific heat of
the handle of the
cooking utensil
high
high
low
low

13. The diagrams show four types of metal block of the same mass being heated using the same quantity of
heat for 10 minutes.
Which metal block shows the highest increase in the temperature? (2005)

14. Which phenomenon shows the application of specific heat capacity in everyday life? (2012)

FIZIKMOZAC

A.
B.
C.
D.

Steaming a fish
Cooling a car engine
Cooling down coffee
Pouring coffee from a coffee maker

15. At night, land cools down faster than sea. Which statement explains the situation? (2012)
A. Solid releases heat faster than liquid
B. Sea absorbs hear more than land during night
C. The breeze blows from the sea to the land during night
D. Specific heat capacity of sea water is greater than land.
16. 17 600 J of heat is used to increase the temperature of 800 g metal block from 30C to 55 C. What is the
specific heat capacity of the metal block? (2012)
A. 259 J kg-1 C-1.
B. 400 J kg-1 C-1.
C. 733 J kg-1 C-1.
D. 880 J kg-1 C-1.
17. The diagrams represent two beakers contain liquid W and liquid X respectively. Each liquids receiving
the same heat energy Q.

Which statement about W and X is correct?

A
The specific heat capacity of W is half the
specific heat capacity X.
B
The specific heat capacity of W is twice the
specific heat capacity X.
C
The specific heat capacity of W is same as the specific heat capacity X.
18. Diagram 17 shows a lead block, an iron block and an aluminium block. All the blocks have the same
mass and heated with same amount of heat energy in 15 minutes. The specific heat capacity, c, of each
metal is different. (2010)

Which statement is correct at the end of the 15 minutes?

A. The lead block has the lowest final temperature
B. The aluminium block has the highest final temperature
C. The final temperature of the iron block is equal to the aluminium block
D. The final temperature of the lead block is higher than the iron block.
1. Question 2: SPM 2003
The blocks P and Q in Figure 1 have the same mass. They are immersed in boiling water for a long time. P
and Q are then transferred into beakers X and Y respectively as shown in Figure 2.

FIZIKMOZAC

Figure 1

Figure 2

The mass of water in both beakers X and Y is 0.25 kg and the initial temperature of the water in each beaker
is the same.
Specific heat capacity of P
= 900 Jkg-1 oC-1
Specific heat capacity of Q
= 390 J kg-1 oC-1
Specific heat capacity of water
= 4 200 Jkg-1 oC-1
(a)(i) State the initial temperature of the blocks.

[1 mark]

(ii) Why is the final temperature of the water in beaker X higher than that in beaker Y?
___________________________
(b)(i) Calculate the rise in temperature of water in beaker Y if block Q release

[1 mark]
8 400 J of heat energy.
[2 marks]

(ii) State one assumption which you have made in b(i).

_________________________________________
[1 mark]

2. Question 8 SPM 2010

Table 8 shows two types of pot and their characteristics.
Clay pot
Copper pot

FIZIKMOZAC

Specific heat capacity,

c of clay
= 900 J kg-1 C-1.
Mass = 3.5 kg

Specific heat capacity,

c for copper
= 390 J kg-1 C-1.
Mass = 2.5 kg

(a) What is the meaning of specific heat capacity?

[1 mark]

(b) Based on Table 8, state suitable characteristics of the pot if it is to be used for cooking something
rapidly.
Give reason for the suitability of the characteristics.
(i)
Material for making the pot. [2 marks]

Reason

(ii)

Material for making the handle of the pot.

[2 marks]

Reason

(iii)

Mass of the pot.

[2 marks]

Reason

(c) The pots are heated by using an electric hot plate of power 800 W. Based on the information in Table
8, calculate the time taken to achieve a temperature rise of 90 C for:
(i)
The clay pot
[2 marks]

(ii)

The copper pot.

[2 marks]

(d) Determine the most suitable pot that is the safest to handle and can be heated in the shortest period of
time.

[1 mark]
3. Question 8, SPM 2012
Diagram 8 shows two models of frying pan.

FIZIKMOZAC

(a) Based on the information in Diagram 8, state the suitable characteristics of the frying pan used for
cooking. Give reason for the suitability of the characteristics.
Type of surface.
[2 marks]

Reason

(ii)

Specific heat capacity.

[2 marks]

Reason

(b) Based on the answer in 8(b), determine which model of frying pan in Diagram 8 will absorb the heat
effectively. Give reason for your choice.
[2 marks]

..
(c) A kettle contained 0.5 kg water. The average heat absorbed by the water is 16 J s -1 in 25 minutes.
Calculate:
(i)
The amount of heat absorbed by water.
[3 marks]
(ii)

The rise in temperature of the water (specific heat capacity of water = 4 200 J kg-1 C-1)
[2 marks]

4.3
Activity 1:
A. To study the change in temperature when heat is supplied to a solid at its melting point.
Water exists in three phases: solid (ice), liquid and gaseous phase (steam). Figure 1.1 shows ice cubes in a
beaker that has just been taken out from the freezer. Figure 1.2 shows all ice melts to water.

FIZIKMOZAC

1.
2.
3.

The change of phase when the ice is melting: ________ to _______.

The temperature when ice melts remains ___________.
The heat absorbed by the ice is used to ________ the bond between the molecules. There is no increase
in the average ____________ energy of the ice molecules. Hence the temperature remains ___________
during the change of phase.

B.

To study the change in temperature when heat is supplied to a liquid at its boiling point.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Fill a beaker with tap water.

Record the initial temperature of the water in the beaker.
Heat the water in the beaker.
Record the temperature of the water every 30 s and note the time when the water begins to boil.
Continue to record the temperature for a few minutes.
Time when water begins to boil : __________

Discussion:
1.
2.
3.

The temperature of the water __________ before it boils.

The change of state when the water is boiling: _________ to ______
The temperature of the water while it is boiling remain __________.

Conclusion
1. The heat supplied to a substance during change of phase does not cause a change in the ____________
of the substance.
2. When a solid melts, heat is __________ but temperature remains ___________
3. When a liquid is boiling, heat is also __________ but temperature remains _____________.
4. The heat absorbed or given out at constant temperature during change of phase is known as _________
________
What does the word latent heat mean?
Latent heat means hidden heat. This heat energy changes the state of a substance (phase change). The heat
cannot be seen because there is no rise in temperature of the substance.
Phase Change

FIZIKMOZAC

When a phase change has occurred , latent heat is absorbed or released.

Define Latent Heat:

The heat absorbed or the heat released at _______ temperature during a change of ____________.
Latent heat of Fusion:
Latent Heat of fusion is the heat absorbed by a __________ solid
During melting, the heat absorbed is used to _________ up the bonds between the molecules.
The particles are _________ from their fixed positions and are able to vibrate and move among each

other as molecules of _________.

This transfer of heat does not cause a change in the kinetic energy of the molecules.
The temperature remains constant during a change of phase

FIZIKMOZAC

Latent Heat of Vaporisation

The heat absorbed during ___________
When a liquid boils, the heat absorbed is used to
(a) completely ___________ the bonds between the particles.
(b) Do work against __________ pressure when the gaseous vapour expands into the atmosphere.
Activity 2: Heating Curve when a substance in a solid state heated uniformly and undergoes a change of
phase solid to liquid to gas

LM :
The heat is ______________ by the solid. It temperature ________. Kinetic energy of molecules
____________. Kinetic energy is ___________ proportional to temperature.
L: _______________ M : ______________
MN:
The heat is ____________ by the solid as it melts.
But the temperature remains _____________.
Kinetic energy remains _____________
M :_________________ MN: ________________
N: ________________
NO :
The heat is ______________ by the liquid. It temperature ________. Kinetic energy of molecules
____________.
N: _______________ O : ______________
OP:
The heat is ____________ by the liquid as it boils.
But the temperature remains _____________.
Kinetic energy remains _____________
O :_________________ OP: ________________
P: ________________

FIZIKMOZAC

Activity 3: Cooling Curve when a substance in a gaseous state cools dow and undergoes a change of phase
gas to liquid to solid

PQ :
The heat is ______________ by the gas. It temperature ________. Kinetic energy of molecules
____________. Kinetic energy is ___________ proportional to temperature.
P: _______________ Q : ______________
QR:
The heat is ____________ by the gas as it condenses. But the temperature remains _____________. Kinetic
energy remains _____________
Q :_________________ QR: ________________
R: ________________
RS :
The heat is ______________ by the liquid. It temperature ________. Kinetic energy of molecules
____________.
R: _______________ S : ______________
ST:
The heat is ____________ by the liquid as it solidifies. But the temperature remains _____________. Kinetic
energy remains _______
S :_________________ ST: ________________
T: ________________
Define Specific Latent Heat

Symbol

Q
l
m

Physical
Quantity

Q
m
l

Define Specific Latent Heat of fusion

Unit

FIZIKMOZAC

Define Specific Latent Heat of Vapori-sation

What does it means by the specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 336 000J kg-1?

What does it means by the specific latent heat of vaporization of water is 2 260000 J kg -1?
___________________________________________
___________________________________________

The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.34 x 105 J kg-1.

The specific latent heat of vaporization of water is 2.26 x 106 J kg-1.
Why are the values of these two latent heats different?

In latent heat of fusion, the energy is given to the molecules in solid so that they can move freely as in a
liquid.

In latent heat of vaporization, a large amount of energy is needed to separate the liquid molecules to gas
molecules and overcome the atmospheric pressure to allow them to move around as gas molecules.

Solve problems involving specific latent heat

When the heat added or
removed changes the
temperature of an
object, the heat is
calculated using
Q = mc

When the heat added

or removed changes
the phase of an object
at constant
temperature, the heat
is calculated using
Q = ml

If heat is supplied by electric heater to change

the phase of a substance, the equation Q = ml
can be written as
Q = Pt = ml
P = power of the heater, unit in W,
t = time ,unit is seconds

Exercise

FIZIKMOZAC

If 2 kg of ice melts when 452 000 J of heat energy is supplied to it, what is the specific latent heat of ice?

2.

An immersion heater supplies heat at a rate of 50 J s-1 to an insulated vessel containing a liquid. The
liquid is brought to its boiling point and kept boiling for 2 minutes, during which time the mass of the
liquid lost is 40 g. What is the value of the specific latent heat of vaporization of the liquid?

3.

Ice cubes of mass 50 g at 0 C is heated by a 50 W heater. The ice takes 5 minutes to melt completely.
What is its specific latent heat of fusion of ice?

4.

An immersion heater rated at 500 W is fitted into a large block of ice at 0 C. The specific latent heat of
fusion of ice is 3.34 x 106 J kg-1. How long does it take to melt 1.5 kg of ice?

5.

A 500 W electric heater is used to boil water. What is the time required to reduce the mass of water by 70
g after the water has reached its boiling point? (Specific latent heat of vaporization of water is 2.26 x 10 6
J kg-1)

0.5 kg of water of 30 C is heated until all of it is converted to steam. What is the amount of heat energy
supplied to it?
(Specific heat capacity of water = 4 200 J kg-1C-1
Specific latent heat of vaporization = 2.26 x 106 J kg-1)
6.

FIZIKMOZAC

3.2 kg of water at 28 C is heated until half of it is changes to steam at 100 C. How much heat energy
needs to be supplied to the water?
(Specific heat capacity of water = 4 200 J kg-1C-1
Specific latent heat of vaporization = 2.26 x 106 J kg-1)
7.

Activity 4: Experiment to determine the specific latent heat of fusion of ice

Apparatus : Immersion heater (12 V, 50 W), 2 beakers, retort stand and clamps, power supply, 2 filter funnels
and triple beam balance
Material : Ice
Procedure:
1. Measure the masses of beaker 1 ad beaker 2 and record as m1 and m2 respectively.
2. Arrange the apparatus as shown in the diagram. At first, both the beakers are not placed under the filter
funnels.

3.

Switch on the power supply of Set and wait until water flows from the filter funnels at a steady rate.
Place beaker 1 and beaker 2 under respective funnels and start the stopwatch.
4. Switch off the power supply after 5 minutes.
5. Remove the beakers. Measure the masses of both beakers again and record as m3 and m4 respectively.
Results:
Mass of beaker 1,
m1 =
Mass of beaker 2

m2 =

Mass of beaker 1 +
water
Mass of beaker 2 with
water
Energy supplied by
the heater,

m3 =
m4 =
Q = Pt

FIZIKMOZAC

Mass of ice melted in

m3 m1 =
beaker 1
Mass of ice melted in
m4 m2 =
beaker 2
Mass of ice melted by
m = (m3 m1) (m4 m2)
the heat supplied by
=
the heater,
Specific latent heat of fusion

Discussion:
1. In this experiment, explain why the stopwatch is not started immediately after the heater of Set 1 is
switched on.
_______________________________________
2.

Set 2 is known as a control set. Explain the necessity of having a control set in the experiment.

___________________________________________

3.

Compare the value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice you obtained from this activity to the value
given in the textbook. Give possible reasons for any difference in the two values.

___________________________________________
___________________________________________
Activity 5:Experiment to determine the specific latent heat of vaporization of water
Apparatus : Immersion heater (240 V, 1 000 W), stopwatch, weighing balance
Material
: water
Procedure:
1. When the water is boiling, record the initial reading of the balance and start
2. the stopwatch at the same time.
3. After 5 minutes, record the reading of the balance

Result:
Initial mass of water

m1 =

Final mass of water

m2 =

Time taken

t=

Power of heater

P=

Mass of water boiled

away,

m1 m2 = m =

FIZIKMOZAC

Specific latent heat of vaporization,

Discussion:
1. Do you expect the value of the specific latent heat of vaporization obtained in this activity to be smaller
or larger than the standard value given in the textbook? Explain your answer.
___________________________________________
___________________________________________
Applications of Specific Latent Heat in Everyday Life

Drinks can be cooled by adding in several cubes of ice. When ice melts a large amount of heat is
absorbed and this lowers the temperature of the drink.

The freshness of fish and meat can be maintained by placing them in contact with ice. With its larger
latent heat, ice is able to absorb a large quantity of heat from the fish as it melts. Thus, food can be kept
at a low temperature for an extended period of time.

Water has a large specific latent heat of vaporization. This property enables steam to be used for
cooking by the method of steaming. When steam condenses on the food, the latent heat is released
directly onto the food enables the food to be cooked at a faster rate.

Our bodies feel cool after sweating. This is because latent heat of vaporization is absorbed from the
body when sweat evaporates. As a result, the body is cooled by the removal of heat.

Always be very careful when opening the lid of a pot when the water in it is boiling. Water has a
large specific latent heat of vaporization. When steam condenses on the skin of your arm, the very
large amount of latent heat released can cause a serious burn.

FIZIKMOZAC

1.

When a liquid is heated, its temperature will remain constant when the liquid starts to ________
A. boil
B. melt
C. condense
D. evaporate

2.

The graph shows the temperature change when a liquid is heated. At which labeled part would it be a
mixture of liquid and gas?

A.
B.
C.

AB
BC
CD

3.

Latent heat is hidden because it ____________.

A. cannot be measured
B. does not actual exist
C. is a form of internal kinetic energy
D. is used to overcome the attractive forces between the molecules

4.

Specific latent heat is measured in ______

A. J C-1
B. J kg-1 C-1
C. J kg-1
D. J kg-1 C-1

5.

The following is a temperature time graph for a substance Y which is heated. What is happening at
QR?

A.
B.
C.
D.
6.

Substance Y is being heated up

Substance Y is boiling at its boiling point.
Substance Y is melting at its melting point.
Substance Y undergoes chemical changes.

The specific latent heat of fusion is the heat required to ___________

A. change 1 kg of ice into water at 0 C
B. change 1 kg of water to steam at 100 C
C. change the temperature of 1 kg of ice by 1 C
D. change the temperature of 1 kg of water by 1 C

FIZIKMOZAC

7.

There is no rise in temperature when heat is supplied to melt ice. Which of the following explains this
observation?
A. The heat is used to exert pressure on molecules.
B. The heat is used to increase the vibrations of molecules.
C. The heat is used to increase the kinetic energy of molecules.
D. The heat is used to overcome the attractive forces between molecules.

8.

Drinks can be cooled by adding in several cubes of ice. When the ice is melting _______.
A. a large amount of heat is absorbed and lowers the temperature of the drink.
B. a large amount of heat is released and lowers the temperature of the drink.
C. the kinetic energy of the water molecules increases.

9.

The diagram shows a process in which water is changed to steam.

The heat absorbed during the process is called

A specific heat capacity of vapour
B specific heat capacity of liquid
C latent heat of vaporisation
D latent heat of fusion
10. The graph shows the heating curve of a substance. Which of the phases labeled A, B, C or D, shows
heat is absorbed during the melting process? (2006)

11. Diagram below is a graph which shows the heating curve of water.

What is the effect of the heat absorbed by the water between point S and point T? (2007)

FIZIKMOZAC

A. It weakens the forces between the water molecules.

B. It breaks the bonds between the water molecules.
C. It increases the kinetic energy of the water molecules.
D. It strengthens the bonds between the water molecules.
12. Diagram 13 shows the cooling curve of a substance.

At which stages are specific latent heat released? (2008)

A. VW and XY
B. WX and YZ
C. VW and YZ
D. WX and XY
13. Diagram 14 shows the heating curve of a sample of naphthalene.

Naphthalene starts to melt at the time (2009)

A. tO
C. t2
B. t1
D. t3
14. Diagram 15 shows a process of change of state.

In which process, A, B, C or D, is latent heat of vaporization absorbed? (2010)

15. What occurs during the melting of naphthalene? (2011)
A. Heat is released by the naphthalene
B. Temperature of the naphthalene does not increase
C. The bonding force between the naphthalene molecules increases
D. The kinetic energy of the naphthalene molecules remain constant.
16. The latent heat of fusion for water is heat absorbed by.(2011)
A. 1 kg of ice during melting without changes in temperature
B. 1 m3 of ice during melting without changes in temperature
C. 1 kg of water to increase the temperature by 1 C
D. 1 m3 of water to increase the temperature by 1 C.
17. How much heat is needed to be supplied to change 500 g of ice block at 0 C to water at 0C? (specific
latent heat of fusion = 3.36 x 105 J/kg) (2012)
A. 6.72 x 102 J

FIZIKMOZAC

B.
C.
D.

1.68 x 105 J
6.72 x 105 J
1.68 x 108 J

PAPER 2 SECTION A
1. A solid substance of mass 0.1 kg is heated using 200 W heater. A graph showing in variation of
temperature with time is shown in Figure below.

(a) Based on the graph , what are the states of matter between point

(b)

(i)

WX : ________________

(ii)

XY : _________________

(iii)

YZ : _________________

Using kinetic theory of matter explain why

(i) at section XY , the temperature is remains constant?

____________________________________
_____________________________________
(ii)

at section YZ the temperature increases

_____________________________________

(c) Using the graph,determine

(i)
the melting point of the substance? ________
(ii)

the specific latent heat of fusion of the substance.

_______________________________________
(iii)

The specific heat capacity of the substance.

2. SPM 2005
Sweating is one of the ways our body maintains the body temperature of about 37 o C. Sweat is largely made
up of water and it comes from sweat glands as shown in the following figure.

FIZIKMOZAC

When sweat evaporates, it takes heat away from our body.

(a) What is meant by evaporation?

(b) Using kinetic theory of matter, explain how evaporation takes away heat from our body.
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
(b) State two environmental factors that affect the rate of evaporation of sweat.
1. _________________________
2. _________________________
(c) While playing badminton, 0.05 kg of sweat was evaporated from Ahmads body. Calculate the quantity
of heat lost from his body due to the evaporation.
The latent heat of vaporization of sweat is 2.3 x 106 J kg-1 .

3. SPM 2007
Diagram 1 shows the change of phase when 1 kg of ice is converted into steam.

Q1 , Q2 , and Q3 are the heat energies absorbed during the heating process.
(a)
Name the heat energy, Q1 , which is absorbed from R to S.
_____________________________________
(b) State one reason why the temperature at R and S is the same even though heat is supplied.
__________________________________________
(c) Calculate the heat energy, Q2 , which is absorbed from S to T.
(The specific heat capacity of water, C = 4 200 J kg-1 C-1]

FIZIKMOZAC

(d) Sketch the graph of temperature against time on Diagram 2 to show the change of phase from R to
U.

4. Question 8: SPM 2008

Diagram 8.1 shows a 500 W electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water on a compression balance.

(a) State the energy change involved when using the heater to heat the water.

[1 mark]

..
(b) The mass of water is 0.5 kg and the specific heat capacity of water is 4 2000 J kg-1 C-1. The initial
temperature of the water is 30 C.
Calculate the energy absorbed by the water to reach its boiling point.
[2 marks]

(c) When the water is boiling, the reading of the compression balance decreases by 0.0125 kg in 60 s.
Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporization of the water.

[2 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

(d) Q, R and S are three different hot plates. These hot plates are used to heat roti canai. Table 8 shows
the characteristics of each plate.
Hot
plates
Q
R
S

(i)

Specific heat
capacity, c
J kg-1 C-1
390
900
400

Mass, m
Kg
3.0
2.5
4.0

Power, P
W
600
1 200
900

The initial temperature of each plate is 30 C. The plates are ready to use when their temperature reaches
200 C. Calculate the time to reach 200 C for each plate.
[5 marks]
Plate Q

(ii)

Plate R

(iii)

Plate S

(e)(i) Based on the answers in 8(d), which plate is the most suitable for heating roti canai?

[1 mark]
(ii)State one reason for the answer in 8(e)(i).

[1 mark]

FIZIKMOZAC

4.4

Explain gas pressure, temperature and volume in terms of the behavior of gas molecules

The molecules of a gas are always in _________ motion. They do not remain still but move around in all
directions.
They will keep moving in a straight line until they ___________ with another molecules or the walls of the
container

How the gas pressure is produced?

Imagine a molecule of mass, m approaching one wall with velocity , v .
Its momemtum = ________
It rebounds with velocity (-v) because it experiences an __________ collision.
Its momentum now is _______
So the change of momentum = _______
When collisions occur, what happens to the container?
Every time a collision occurs, there is a _________ in momentum of the gas molecule.
As we know, _________ is the rate of change of momentum, therefore a force acts on the wall of the
container.
___________ is defined as force per unit area.
Therefore the pressure of a gas is due to the force of the collisions of the gas molecules with the walls of
the container.
What happen when a gas is heated?

At room temperature, gas molecules are fast moving. What happens when the gas in the container is
heated?
When the gas is heated, the heat energy received is converted into _________ energy

FIZIKMOZAC

of the molecules. This causes the molecules to move __________.

The average kinetic energy of the gas particles depends only on the temperature of the gas. The higher
the temperature, the ______ the average speed of the gas molecules.
The gas molecules will therefore collide with the walls of the container more often.
Since the frequency of collisions with the walls of the container increases, what happens to the gas
pressure?
For a constant volume of a fixed mass of gas, when its temperature increases, its pressure will also
__________ as the gas molecules move faster and collide with the walls more often.

When the piston is pressed down, what happens

to the volume of the gas?

When the piston is pressed down, the volume of the container ___________ and so the volume of the gas
also ___________.
When the volume of a gas decreases, the gas molecules travel a __________ distance before colliding
with the walls of the container.
This means they will collide with the walls of the container more _____________.

What happens to the pressure of the gas?

Since the frequency of collisions between the gas molecules and the walls of the container ___________,
the pressure of the gas ______.
Property of gas and explanation based on the kinetic
theory
Property of
Explanation based on the kinetic
gas
theory
Volume

The molecules move __________in

random motion and fill up the whole
________in the container.

The volume of the gas is equal to

the volume of the _________

Temperature

Pressure

The molecules are in continuous

________ motion and have average
_________energy which is
proportional to the temperature.
The average speed of gas
molecules depends on the
temperature of the gas. The higher
the temperature, the _________the
average speed of the molecules.
The molecules are in continuous
______________ motion.
When a molecules
____________with the __________of
the containers and bounces back,
there is a change in ____________
and a ___________ is exerted on the
wall.
The force per unit area is the
___________ of the gas
The pressure exerted by a gas on
the walls of a container is due to the
___________of its molecules
against the wall of the container.

Determine the relationship between pressure and volume for a fixed mass of gas

FIZIKMOZAC

P1
V1

P2
V2

From Kinetic Theory

When the volume of a gas is decreased, the number of ___________per unit volume is _____________,
that is , the same number of molecules will move in _____________space.

The molecules _________________more ____________with the wall of the container.

This ___________in the rate of collision results in an increase in the pressure exerted by the gas.

Boyless Law states that for a fixed mass of gas,

The mathematical expression for Boyles law:

Boyles Law can be shown graphically:

Experiment to determine the relationship between pressure and volume of a fixed mass of gas at constant
temperature

Figure shows air being released by a fish. Observe the change in the air bubbles as they
rise towards the surface of the water.
Based on your observations
(a) Make one suitable inference

(b)State one appropriate hypothesis that could be investigated

Aim: .
.
Manipulated Variables:
Responding Variables: ..

FIZIKMOZAC

Constant Variables:
List of apparatus & material:l Glass syringe, slotted weight, rubber tube, clip, ruler, grease

Procedure:
1.
Push the piston so that volume = 100 cm3 of air is trapped inside the syringe.
2.
The pressure of the air inside the syringe is given by the reading on the Bourdon gauge.
3.
The experiment is repeated by reducing the volume of the trapped air V = 80 cm 3, 60 cm3, 40 cm3
and 20 cm3.
Volume, V
/cm3

1/V / cm-3

Pressure , P
Pa

Analyze data: Plot the graph of pressure, P against volume, V

FIZIKMOZAC

Plot the graph of pressure, P against 1/V

FIZIKMOZAC

Discussion:
1. From the graph of P against V, state the
relationship between P and V. Does the result
support your hypothesis?

Determine the relationship between volume and

temperature for a fixed mass of gas

___________________________________________

Solve problems regarding Boyles Law

1.

A weather balloon is filled with helium gas to

a volume of 30 litres of 1.0 atm pressure. The
balloon is then release. As the balloon rises
up to the sky, its volume increases. What is
the pressure of the helium gas when the
volume of the balloon increases to 120 litres?

2.

An air bubble of volume 5 cm3 is released by

an air pump at a depth of 0.5 m. Calculate the
volume of the air bubble when it reaches the
surface of the water. [ The atmospheric
pressure = 10 m water ]

2.

4.

A small mass of gas is trapped by 3 cm length

mercury in a small tube as shown in the
diagram. The tube is then turned around so
that it is upright. What is the new length of
the trapped gas? (atmospheric pressure = 75
cm Hg)

Figure (a) shows a J-shaped contains 6 cm3

of air trapped by mercury. Figure (b) shows
more mercury is poured into the open tube of
the J-shaped until the level differ by 150 cm.
What is the volume,V of the trapped air ?
The atmospheric pressure = 75 cm of mercury

Diagram (a) Diagram (b)

V1

V2

V2

T1

T2

T2

In fixed mass of gas at constant pressure, the

frequency of collisions between the gas
molecules and the walls container is
____________.
As the gas is heated, the temperature of the
gas is ___________. The molecules move
_________ as their ________ energy _______.
They collide with the walls more __________
and at greater speed.
So they exert a larger __________ on the
walls of the containers.
The molecules push the piston so that the
gas __________
The faster molecules now move in a
_______space. The frequency of collisions
with the walls will not increase but remain as
before.
The pressure of the gas remains constant and
the volume of the gas ____________ with
temperature.

The volume of a gas decreases when its

temperature is ___________
At 0 C, the gas has certain volume.

What is absolute zero of temperature?

The lowest possible temperature that is

-273C ( 0 Kelvin / 0 K)

The gas particles theoretically ________

moving and have ________ volume.
The temperature measured in Kelvin scale is
called the absolute temperature.

FIZIKMOZAC

Temperature
Unknown
temperature
C to K
Unknown
temperature
K to C
Absolute
zero
Ice point

Celsius scale
C

Kelvin scale
( + 273) K

(X 273) C

XK

Steam point

Aim: .
Manipulated Variable: .
Responding Variable:..
Constant Variable : .
List of apparatus & material; thermometer,
capillary tube , beaker,retort stand, Bunsen
burner, tripod stand, wire gauze, ruler, sulphuric
acid ,water and ice.
Arrangement of apparatus

The graph of volume against absolute

temperature (in the Kelvin scale) is a straight line
passing through the origin, if the pressure and
mass of the gas is kept constant

Charles law states that for a fixed mass of gas,

Mathematical expression:

Experiment to determine the relationship between

volume and temperature of a fixed mass of gas at
constant pressure
A balloon is inflated and fix onto
the bottles mouth as in Figure.
When the bottle is placed in a
beaker of hot water the balloon
is inflated further.
Based on your observations
(a) Make one suitable inference

(b)State one appropriate hypothesis that could be

investigated

Plot graph L vs

Procedure
Ice is placed into the water and these are
continuously stirred .
Record the initial temperature of the water, = 20
C.
Record the vertical column , L of trapped air .
The experiment is repeated = 30 C, 40 C, 50
C, 60 C, 70C.
Temperature, / C.
30
40
50
60
70

Length of vertical
column L / cm

FIZIKMOZAC

1.

From the graph of L against state the relationship between L and .

Solve problems regarding Charles law

1.

Change below temperature:

C
Kelvin, K
Kelvin, K

47

175

373

375

FIZIKMOZAC

- 200
2.

1000

A cylinder contains 200 cm3 of gas at a

temperature of 27 C. The gas is heated until
its temperature increases by 30 C. If the
piston of the cylinder expands under constant
pressure, what is the final volume of the gas?
Pressures Law states that for a fixed mass of gas,

3.

The volume of a fixed mass of gas is 150 cm3

at 37 C. If the gas is heated at a constant
pressure, calculate the volume of the gas
when the temperature reaches 77 C.
Mathematical expression:

4.

The diagram shows a glass tube containing

some trapped air inside it. At 17o C , the
vertical column of trapped air is 29 cm. What
is the vertical column of trapped air at a
temperature of 57oC ?

Determine the relationship between pressure and

temperature
When the temperature of a gas is raised, the
kinetic energy of the molecules ___________.
The molecules move ________ and collide
more frequently with the walls of the
container.
Thus, the pressure of the gas ____________

When the graph is extrapolated, it is found that

the gas pressure becomes zero at -273 C

Solve problems regarding Pressure Law

1. The pressure of nitrogen gas in a light bulb is
60 kPa at 20 C. Calculate the temperature of
the gas when the pressure inside the bulb
rises to 90 kPa after the bulb is lighted up.

2.

An iron cylinder containing gas has a

pressure of 360 kPa when it is kept in a store
at 27 C. Calculate the pressure of the gas
when the cylinder is moved outdoors where
the temperature is 50 C.

3.

A sealed container contains a gas at a

pressure of 4 atmospheres and at a
temperature of 27 C. Find the pressure of
the gas in the container if the temperature is
raised to 102 C.
A motorcycle tyre is found to posses a
pressure of 3.2 atmospheres when it was
tested in a garage at a temperature of 27C.
By assuming that the volume of the air in the
tyre is fixed, what is the surrounding
temperature if the tyre is found to posses a
pressure of 2.8 atm?

4.

Activity : Application of gas laws.

FIZIKMOZAC

1.

Why a dented ping pong can be repaired by

placing the dented ball in hot water? Name the
gas law corresponding to this problem.

......................................................................................

2.

Explain why it is very

dangerous to throw an empty
aerosol can in fire. Name the
gas laws involved.

........................................................
..
..
..
.
3.

Explain why
the size of air
bubble
increases as it
goes up to the
surface of
water. Name
the gas laws
involved.

..

FIZIKMOZAC

TUTORIAL 4.4
1. Some gas trapped in a cylinder is compressed at constant temperature by a piston. Which of the
following is not change?
A Mass
B Density
C Pressure
D Molecular spacing
2.

Why does the pressure of a fixed mass of gas increase when it is heated at a constant volume?
A. The number of the molecules increases
B. The density of the molecules increases
C. The average mass of the molecules increases
D. The average speed of the molecules Increases

4.

The diagram shows a syringe is placed in hot water. The outlet of the syringe is sealed.

Why the piston begins to rise when the syringe is placed in the hot water?
A. The walls of syringe is expanding
B. More molecules are created by the hot water
C. The molecules of trapped air are getting bigger
D. The trapped air molecules are hitting the piston more often
5.

A 5 cm3 balloon is filled by a gas at a pressure of 1 x 105 Pa . When the balloon is filled by 20 cm3 of the
gas, what is the new pressure of the gas?
A. 1.0 x 105 Pa
B. 4.0 x 104Pa
C. 2.5 x 104Pa
D. 4 x 103 Pa
E. 5x 103 Pa

6.

The figure shows an air column trapped in a capillary tube by 5 cm of mercury. The capillary tube at two
different situations.

What is the value of x ?

[ The atmospheric pressure

= 75 cm Hg]

FIZIKMOZAC

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

21.8 cm
23.4 cm
25.0 cm
26.7 cm
28.6 cm

7.

The air bubbles formed in base of a lake expand as they float towards the surface because
A
the density of the water increases as the depth of water increases.
B
the pressure of the water increases as the depth of water increases.
C
the temperature of the water increases as the depth of water lake increases.

8.

The diagram shows a glass tube containing some trapped air inside it. At 27o C , the vertical column of
trapped air is 10 cm.

What is the temperature of trapped air is heated when the vertical column of trapped air is 10.9 cm ?
A. 42oC
B. 480C
C. 540C
D. 57oC
E. 62oC
9.

Figure (a) shows a cylinder containing gas at temperature 30o C . The height of the cylinder is P.
Figure (b) shows the gas in the cylinder is heated so that it expands to a height 3P.

What is the final temperature of the gas?

A. 90oC
B. 180oC
C. 303oC
D. 636oC
E. 819oC
10. Before a long journey, the air in a car tyre has pressure of 128 kPa and a temperature of 27 o C . After the
journey the air pressure in the tyre is 132 kPa. Which expression determines the temperature of air in the
tyre after the journey?
[ Assume the volume of the tyre is constant ]
A ( 27 + 273 )o C

132 x 27
128

C 128 x 27
132
D

132 x 300-273
128

FIZIKMOZAC

128 x 300 - 273

132

11. Diagram 13 shows the condition of a plastic bottle which initially contains hot air, before and after being
put into a basin of ice.

The above situation can be explained by (2007)

A. Boyles law
B. Charless law
C. Pressure law
12. Boyles law states that PV = constant. Which graph represents the equation? (2008)

13. A fixed mass of gas in a container of fixed volume is heated. Which statement is correct? (2008)
A. The pressure of the gas is constant
B. The molecules of the gas move further apart
C. The kinetic energy of the gas molecules is constant
D. The molecules of the gas move with higher velocity.
14. Diagram 12 shows a syringe connected to a Bourdon gauge. The readings on the Bourdon gauge before
and after the piston is pushed in are shown below.

FIZIKMOZAC

Which of the following explains this situation? (2009)

E.
Boyles Law
F.
Charles Law
G.
Pascals principle
H.
Bernoullis principle
15. Diagram 13 shows the apparatus used to investigate the relationship between the length, l and the
temperature, T, of the trapped air.

Which graph represents the relationship between l and T? (2009)

16. Diagram 15 shows the pressure temperature graph for a fixed mass of gas at constant volume.

FIZIKMOZAC

Which statement is correct about the condition of the gas? (2010)

A. The gas pressure is zero at 0 C
B. The gas molecules are stationary at -273 C
C. The kinetic energy of the molecules is maximum at -273 C
D. The gas pressure is inversely proportional to the temperature
17. Diagram 16.1 shows a dented ping-pong ball. Diagram 16.2 shows the condition of the ball after being
placed in hot water.

A
B
C
D

Which of the following is correct about the mass of the air and the kinetic energy of the air molecules
inside the ping-pong ball when the ball is placed in hot water? (2010)
Mass of the air
Kinetic energy of the air
molecules
Increases
Increases
Unchanged
Unchanged
Decreases
Unchanged
Unchanged
Increases

PAPER 2, SECTION A
1. Question 6: Melaka 08
Diagram 6.1 and Diagram 6.2 show an experiment is carried out to investigate a law of gas. A column of air is
trapped in the capillary tube and is heated for a period of time.

Diagram 6.1

Diagram 6.2

FIZIKMOZAC

(a) What is meant by heat?

[1 mark]

......................................................................
(b) (i) Compare the length of the air trapped in the capillary tube in Diagram 6.1 and Diagram 6.2.
.....................................................................
[1 mark]
(ii) Compare the temperature of the air trapped in the capillary tube in Diagram 6.1 and Diagram 6.2.
[1 mark]
............................................................................
(iii) Name the physical quantity represented by the length of the air trapped. [1 mark]
.............................................................................
(iv) What is the relationship between the physical quantity in (b)(iii) and the temperature?
[1 mark]
................................................ .
(c) Name the physics law involved in (a)(iv).
..................................................... ..
[1 mark]
(d) Diagram 6.3 shows a graph obtained from the experiment. The temperature, is -273oC
extrapolated and intersect x-axis.

(i)

What is the name given to the temperature, ?

[1 mark]

..................................................................
(ii) State one characteristic of the gas at temperature ?
.................................................................

[1 mark]

when it is

FIZIKMOZAC

2. SPM 2011 Question 5

Diagram 5.1 and Diagram 5.2 show trapped air in two identical flasks heated with different quantity of heat.
Both stoves are turned off after 10 minutes.

Diagram 5.1

Diagram 5.2
(a) State the physical quantity measured by a Bourdon gauge.

[1 mark]

.................................................................................
(b) Based on Diagram 5.1 and Diagram 5.2,
(i) compare the readings of both the Bourdon gauges.

[1 mark]

.....................................................................................
(ii) compare the readings of both thermometers.

(i)

....................................................................................
[1 mark]
state the relationship between the heat supplied and the temperature.
[1 mark]
................................................................
(iv)state the relationship between the pressure of air in the flask and the temperature. [1 mark]
....................................................................................
(a) Based on kinetic theory, explain the reason for the answer in 5(b)(iv).
....................................................................................

[2 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

...................................................................................
..................................................................................
(d) Name the law involved when the
air volume is constant.

[1 mark]

.............................................................................

3. Question 4: SPM 2009

Diagram 4 shows air bubbles produced by an air pump in an aquarium filled with fresh water.

(a) Explain why the volume of an air bubble increases as it moves towards the surface.
[1 mark]

(b) Name the physics law involved in 4(a).

[1 mark]
(c) What is the change in the volume of an air bubble at level R when the fresh water is replaced by sea
water of higher density?
[1 mark]

(d) An air bubble of volume 5 cm3 is released by an air pump at a depth of 0.5 m. Calculate the volume of
the air bubbles when it reaches the surface of the water.
[Assume that the atmospheric pressure is 10 m water]
[3 marks]

PAPER 2,ESSAY QUESTION

1. SPM 2003 Section C
You are representing the country in carrying out a research project on the weather at the North Pole. The
surrounding temperature is between - 40o C to - 8o C. One item of the equipment to be taken for your
research is a thermometer.
(a)
State the principle used in a liquid glass thermometer.
[1 mark]
...................................................................................
(b)

State how a liquid-glass thermometer can be used to measure the body temperature of a sick person.
Explain heat transfer that takes place at each stage of measurement. [4 marks]

......................................................................................

FIZIKMOZAC

......................................................................................
......................................................................................
.....................................................................................
(c)

The table shows the characteristics of six types of thermometers P,Q,R,S,T and U.
Glass-bore
stem and
crosssection

Diameter of
Capillary tube

Glass
walled
bulb

Liquid
used

Thermo-meter
P

mercury

thin

big

thick and
curved

mercury

thick

small

thin and
plane

mercury

thin

small

thin and
curved

alcohol

thick

big

thick and
plane

alcohol

thin

small

thick and
curved

alcohol

thick

small

thin and
plane

Additional information:
Freezing point of mercury = -39oC Boliling point of
mercury = 360oC
Freezing point of alcohol = - 112oC Boiling point of
alcohol = 78oC
Based on the table above;
(i)
Explain the suitable characteristics of the thermometer so that can be used to measure temperatures
at the North Pole.
(ii) Decide which thermometer is most suitable to be taken for your research and give reasons.
[10 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

(d)

A thermometer which is not calibrated has a mercury column of length 8.0 cm when the temperature
is 0o C and 20.0 cm when the temperature is 100oC. The mercury column is 5.0 cm when put in liquid
X.
(i) Determine the temperature of liquid X in Kelvin.

(ii) State a thermometric property used when making of a thermometer.

[5 marks]

2.
(a)

SPM 2004 Essay Section C

The figure shows a food container used for keeping the food warm. The container is able to maintain the
temperature of food for a long time. The container can be moved from one place to another.

The following table shows the characteristics of materials which could be used to make the food
container.
.
Melting
point /o C

Specific heat
capacity/J kg-1 oC-1

2 710

660

910

High

910

27

1 600

Low

1 050

240

1 300

Low

2 600

1 200

670

Low

3 800

2 020

800

High

Material

(i)What is meant by melting point?

Thermal
conductivity

Density/
kg m-3

Character
istic

[1 mark]

FIZIKMOZAC

......................................................................................
(ii) You are asked to investigate the characteristics of the materials in the table which could be used to
make the food container as in the figure above.
Explain the suitability of each characteristics in the table and hence, determine which material is most
suitable to be used to make the food container.
Justify your choice.
[10 marks]

(b) 500 g of hot water at 90 o C is poured into a glass and left to cool down to room temperature at 30 o C.
(i) Sketch the temperature time-graph for the cooling process of the hot water. Use your graph to
explain this process.

(ii) Calculate the quantity of heat lost from the hot water. The specific heat capacity of water is 4 200 J
kg-1 oC-1

10

3. SPM 2006 (Essay Section C)

(a)(i) What is meant by specific latent heat of vapourization?

[1 mark]

.....................................................................................
(ii)Explain why someone who is sweating feels cool when he is under a rotating fan. [4 marks]
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
......................................................................................
(b)

A solid substances, of mass 0.05 kg, is heated using an immersion heater of 240 V, 0.1 kW. Diagram
below shows the heating curve of the solid.

FIZIKMOZAC

Calculate:
i.

the specific latent heat of fusion of the substance

ii.

the specific heat capacity of the substance in liquid state.

[5 marks]

(b) You are asked to investigate the features of cooling material and the design of a car engine radiator
as in Diagram 7.2
Explain the suitability of each features in Diagram 7.2 and then determine the most suitable car
engine radiator to be used.
Give a reason for your choice.
[10 marks]

11

Section C: 2009

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 11.1 shows a metal block, M, of mass 500 g heated in boiling water of temperature 100 C for a long
time. The metal block M is then quickly transferred into 200 g of water at 30 C in a polystyrene cup. The
water is stirred until thermal equilibrium is achieved.

Diagram 11.1
(a)(i) What is the meaning of thermal equilibrium?
.....................................................................................
....................................................................................
[1 mark]
(a)(ii) Explain, in terms of thermal equilibrium, how a thermometer which is placed into the boiling water
reads at the temperature of 100 C.
[4 marks]
......................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................................................
....................................................................................

(b)(i) Calculate the final temperature of the water in the polystyrene cup.
[Specific heat capacity of M = 800 J kg-1 C-1]
[Specific heat capacity of water = 4 200 J kg-1 C-1]
[4 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

(b)(ii)

State one assumption that you have made in 11(b)(i). [1 mark]

......................................................................................
(c) Diagram 11.2 shows a thermos flask used to maintain the temperature of a hot drink for a long time.

Diagram 11.2
Table 11.1 shows the characteristics of four different thermos flasks.
Thermos
flask

Stopper

Space
P

Hollow
plastic
Hollow
plastic
Solid
plastic
Solid
plastic

Vacuum

X
Y
Z

Vacuum
Air
Air

Double walled
tube
Made of Coated
by
Glass
Shiny
paint
Copper
Black
paint
Glass
Black
paint
Copper
Shiny
paint

Additional information:
Specific heat capacity of glass = 840 J kg-1 C-1
Specific heat capacity of copper = 387 J kg-1 C-1
Table 11.1
Explain the suitability of each characteristic of the thermos flasks and determine the most suitable
thermos flask to be used for the purpose of maintaining the temperature of the hot drink. Give reasons
for your choice.
[10 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

PAPER 3 SECTION A
Question 1 SPM 2006
A student carries out an experiment to investigate the relationship between the length of air column, l , and
the temperature, , for a fixed mass of air. The air is trapped by concentrated sulphuric acid in a capillary
tube. Diagram 1.1 shows the thermometer and capillary tube tied on a metre ruler.

Diagram 1.1
The thermometer and capillary tube are place into a beaker filled with water. The arrangement of the
apparatus is shown in Diagram 1.2.

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 1.2
Ice cubes are put into the beaker until the temperature, , reaches 0 C. The actual reading of the length of
the air column, l, is shown in Diagram 1.4.
Then the beaker is heated until the temperature, reaches 20 C. The actual corresponding reading of the
length of the air column, l, is shown in Diagram 1.5. The procedure of the heating process is repeated with
temperatures, = 30 C, 40 C, 50 C, 60 C and 70 C. The actual corresponding readings of the length of
the air column, l, are shown in Diagram 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9 and 1.10.
(a) For the experiment described, identify :
(i)
The manipulated variable
[1 mark]

(ii)

The responding variable

[1 mark]

(iii)

The constant variable

[1 mark]

(b)(i) Diagram 1.3 shows the meniscus of the concentrated sulphuric acid inside the capillary tube.

Diagram 1.3
State the correct position of the eye while taking the reading of the length of the air column.

[1 mark]

FIZIKMOZAC

FIZIKMOZAC

FIZIKMOZAC

(d) Based on your graph , state the relationship

between and .
[1 mark]
..
(e) State one precaution that should be taken to
obtain the accurate readings of . [1 mark]

2. Question 2 SPM 2011

A student carries out an experiment to investigate
the relationship between the pressure, P, and the
temperature, , of a fixed mass of gas.
The result of the experiment is shown in the graph
on P against .

(ii)Based on Diagrams 1.4 , 1.5 , 1.6 , 1.7 , 1.8 , 1.9

and 1.10 on pages 4 and 5 , determine the
lengths of air column , , and their
corresponding temperature , .
Tabulate your results for and in the space
below

(a) Based on the graph in Diagram 2.1:

(i)what happens to P as increases?[1 mark]

(ii)Determine the value of when P = 0 kPa.

Show on the graph, how you determine the
value of
[2 mark]
= ..
(b) Calculate the gradient, m, of the graph P
against .
[3 marks]

(c) The relationship between P and T is given by

(c) On a piece of graph paper , plot a graph of
against .
[5 marks]

P
)
T
R=29.85

where P is the pressure in

FIZIKMOZAC

kPa, T is the temperature in Kelvin and R is a

constant

was observed that the water in pail S is

hotter than the water in pail R.

(i)Given that T = ( + 273), determine T when

= 50 C.
[1 mark]

(ii)Based on the graph in Diagram 2.1,

determine P when = 50 C. Show on the
graph how to determine the value of P.
[2 marks]

(iii)Using the formula

P
)
T
R=29.85

and the values of T and P in 2(c)(i) and 2(c)(ii)

calculate the value of R.
[2 marks]

(d) State one precaution that can be taken to

improve the accuracy of the readings in this
experiment.
[1 mark]
..
PAPER 3: ESSAY
Based on the diagrams in Questions:
(a) make one suitable inference
(b) state one appropriate hypothesis that could
be investigated.
(c) describe how you would design an experiment
to test your hypothesis. In your explanation,
state clearly the following :
(i)
aim of the experiment
(ii)
variables in the experiment
(iii)
list of apparatus and materials
(iv)
arrangement of the apparatus
(v)
the procedures of the experiment, which
includes the method of controlling the
manipulated variable and the method of
measuring the responding variable
(vi)
the way you would tabulate the data
(vii)
the way you would analyse the data
[12 marks]

1.

Diagram 3 shows two pails, R and S, with R

containing more water than S. Both the pails
are exposed to sunlight. After a few hours it

2. SPM 2012
Diagram 3.1 shows a student squeezing a balloon
filled with air. Diagram 3.2 shows the student
squeezing the balloon further upwards. The
volume of the balloon decreases and it becomes
harder.

FIZIKMOZAC

3.

Diagram 1.1 shows a cake before being

baked. Diagram 1.2 show cake after being
baked.
4. SPM 2005
Before going on a long journey, Shareena
measured the air pressure in the tyre of her car,
as shown in Figure 3.1. She found that the air
pressure in the tyre was 190 kPa. After the

FIZIKMOZAC

journey, Shareena measured again the air

pressure in the tyre as shown in Figure 3.2. She
found that the air pressure in the tyre had
increased to 235 kPa. Shareena also found that
the tyre became hot after the journey. However
the size of the tyre remained the same.

FIZIKMOZAC

FIZIKMOZAC

5.1
When we look into a
mirror, we can see
our image in the
mirror. The image
seen in the mirror
looks exactly the
same.
How does the image
in the mirror form?

3.

4.
5.
6.

Mirror works because

it __________ light..
Reflection of light occurs when light rays falling
on a surface __________ off the surface.
The ___________ ray, AO, is the ray of light which
strikes the mirror
The ____________ray , OB, is the ray which is
bounces back from the mirror.
The normal line,N, is a line which is __________to
the surface of a mirror.
The angle between the normal line and the
incident ray is called the angle of
______________, i
The angle between the normal and the reflected
ray is called the angle of ______________, r.
Activity 1: To study the laws of reflection of light
Apparatus: Plane mirror, ray box and protractor,
power supply, white paper
Procedure:
1. Set up the arrangement of the apparatus as
shown.

Table:
Angle of
incidence, i/

Angle of
reflection,
r /

With the help of a protractor, label the normal,

N on the white paper.

20

30

40

50

60

Discussion:
1. From the results, state the relationship
between the angle of incidence, I and the
angle of reflection, r.

State the law of reflection of light

Activity 2: To study the positions and

characteristics of the image formed by plane
mirror.
1. Hold the mirror
vertically. Look into
the mirror. Touch your
left ear. Which ear do
you seem to touch?
.
2.

2.

The plane mirror is arranged perpendicular

with the white paper to ensure that the
incident ray, reflected ray and the normal line
all lie in the same plane.
Arrange the ray box so that the angle of
incidence i, is 20
Measure the angle of reflection r, with the
protractor. Record the value.
Repeat the procedures with i = 30 , 40, 50
and 60.

(a)Place the card with letter L in front of the

mirror and observe its image. Draw the
image.

(b) Can the image be formed on the screen? Is

the image real or virtual?

FIZIKMOZAC

..
(c) From the observation of the image of the
card with letter L, what can you say about
the shape and the size of the image?

Place the plane mirror upright on a piece of white

paper. Using a ray box, produce parallel rays
directed at the mirror. Draw the ray diagram.
Repeat the steps using a convex mirror and a
concave mirror.

Describe the charac-teristics of the image formed

by reflection of light
When a plane mirror forms an image, the image:
1.

________________________________________

2.

________________________________________

3.

________________________________________

4.

________________________________________

Real Image : ________________________________

Virtual image : ______________________________

What happens when parallel rays are directed

towards the 3 types of mirrors?
Plane mirror

: ____________________________

Concave mirror : ____________________________

Convex mirror : ____________________________
Incident rays parallel to the principal axis:

Activity 3 : Draw ray diagram in a plane mirror

Draw ray diagram to determine the position of the
image formed by a plane mirror

Concave mirror

Convex mirror

Pole of
mirror, P
Principal
focus, F

Focal
length, f
Object
distance,
u
Image
distance,
v

Distance of _______ from the pole of the

mirror, P
Distance of _________ from the pole of
the mirror, P

Construction Rules for Concave Mirror and

Convex Mirror
Convex Mirror and Concave Mirror
Activity 4: Image formed by plane mirror, convex
mirror and concave mirror

Rule 1:

FIZIKMOZAC

Concave Mirror
A ray parallel to the
principal axis is
reflected through F.

Convex Mirror
A ray parallel to the
principal axis is
reflected as if it comes
from F.

Rule 2:
f < u < 2f or f < u < c
Concave Mirror
A ray passing through F is reflected parallel to the
principal axis
Rule 3:

Concave Mirror
A ray passing through C is reflected back along the
same path through C.

u
=f
u<f
A
ctivity 5: Ray Diagram to determine the position
and characteristics of an image in a concave
mirror
u > 2f
u = 2f or u = c

Concave mirror
Object
Characteristics of the image:
distrance
u > 2f

FIZIKMOZAC

u < f < 2f

u = 2f
f < u < 2f
u=f
u<f
Ray diagrams for convex mirror
u<f

Conclusion:
Characteristics of the image of convex mirror :

Application of reflection of light

1. Anti-parallax Mirror in Ammeters or Voltmeters
A parallax
error occurs when the eye sees both the pointer and its
image.
The correct
reading is when our eyes are ____________ to the pointer
when the
image of the pointer in the mirror cannot be seen.
2.

Periscope
How does a

In the

periscope work?
reflection of light, the angle of incidence is always
________ to the angle of reflection. In the periscope,
light is incident to the top mirror at a _______ angle and reflects away at a ________ angle down to the

mirror.
The reflected light hits the second mirror at a ______ angle and reflects away at the same angle, right
into your eye.

3.

Why is the word AMBULANCE purposely inverted laterally on an ambulance car?

_______________________
4.

Make-up Mirror

FIZIKMOZAC

Concave mirrors with

The observer must be at
Produce image:

long focal lengths.

an object distance, _________
___________, ___________, ______________

5. Transmission of radio
A ___________ parabolic
The receiver is located at
rays can be ___________

waves and signals

surface is used to focus the radio wave signals.
the __________ point of the reflector so that all light

6. Reflector of torchlight
The light bulb is fixed in
position at the ______ point of the concave mirror to
produce a beam of
_________ light rays. The beam of parallel light
rays will maintain a uniform intensity for a __________ distance.
Other applications are the headlight of motor vehicles and the lamp of slide projectors.

7.

Widening the field of vision

When a convex mirror is used, the field of vision is ________ than a plane
mirror
Convex mirrors are used as rear view mirrors in motor vehicles to give
drivers a wide-angle view of vehicles behind them.
It is also used as shop security mirrors

TUTORIAL 5.1
The diagram shows a light ray from a light
bulb striking a surface of a plane mirror.

The image of the bulb which produce by

the plane mirror is at.
A. P and virtual

FIZIKMOZAC

B. Q and real
C. R and virtual
2

The diagram shows a student looking at a

plane mirror.

The image observed by the student is

.(2003)

The diagram shows Ahmad and Salim

standing in front of a plane mirror at a
distance of 5 m and 3 m respectively.

What is the distance of Ahmads image as

seen by Salim? (2004)
A. 2 m
B. 5 m
C. 6 m
D. 8 m
4

The diagram shows an object placed in

FIZIKMOZAC

front of a concave mirror. The distance of

the object is less than the focal length, f, of
the mirror.

What are the characteristics of the image

formed? (2005)
A. Real, upright, bigger than object
B. Real, inverted, smaller than object
C. Virtual, upright, bigger than object
D. Virtual, inverted, smaller than object
5

The diagram shows two cars, P and Q,

traveling in the opposite directions,
passing through a sharp bend.

Which mirror is the most suitable to be

placed at X so that the driver in car P can
see car Q? (2006)

The diagram shows Ali is taking an eye

test. The distance between Ali and the
plane mirror is 1 m. Ali sees the image of
the object in the mirror.

FIZIKMOZAC

If the distance between the image and Ali is

5 m, calculate the distance between Ali and
the object. (2006)
A. 2 m
C. 3 m
B. 4 m
D. 8 m
7

Which diagram shows the correct reflection

of light from a concave mirror? F is the
principle focus. (2008)

8.

Diagram 18 shows a boy looking at the

image of a letter P in a mirror.

Diagram 18
How far is the image from the boy? (2010)
A. 3 m
B. 4 m
C. 6 m
D. 7 m
Diagram 23 shows an object placed 20 cm
in front of a concave mirror of focal length,
f, 10 cm.

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 23
What are the characteristics of the image
formed? (2010)
A. Real, same size, inverted
B. Real, diminished, inverted
C. Virtual, same size, upright
D. Virtual, diminished, upright
Diagram 14 shows an object placed at O,
in front of a concave mirror. F is the focal
point of the mirror.
10

What are the characteristics of the image

formed? (2007)
A. Virtual and smaller than the object
B. Real and smaller than the object
C. Virtual and bigger than the object
D. Real and bigger than the object
Diagram 15 shows a boy standing in front
of a plane mirror.
11

The boy moves 1 m backwards. Calculate

the distance between the boy and his
image. (2007)
A. 3 m
B. 4 m
C. 6 m
D. 8 m
Diagram 14 shows the positions of a man, a

FIZIKMOZAC

flower pot and a plane mirror.

12

What is the distance, in m, between the

flower pot and the image of the man?
(2009)
A. 1
B. 4
C. 6
D. 7
Diagram 16 shows a boy standing 3 m in
front of a mirror.
13

The mirror is moved 1 m towards the boy.

What is the distance between the boy and
his image? (2011)
A. 1 m
B. 2 m
C. 4 m
D. 8 m

14

Which ray diagram for a concave mirror is

not drawn correctly? [C = centre of
curvature of mirror, F = focal point of
mirror] (2011)

Diagram 16 shows an object in front of a

plane mirror. At which position A, B, C or D
is the image formed? (2012)
15

FIZIKMOZAC

PAPER 2 SECTION A
1. Question 3 (SPM 2005)
Figure 1.1 shows a student stands 3 m from a plane mirror in a room. He sees the image of a wall clock
which is located 2 m behind him.
.

Figure 1.1
Figure 1.2 shows the position of the student in the room.

(a) Name the phenomenon that makes the student sees the image of the wall clock in the plane mirror.
_____________________________
(b) What is the distance between the student and the image of the wall clock?

(c) The student then walks 1 m forward the plane mirror. What is the distance between him and the image of
the clock at this new position?

(d) The time shown by the wall clock is 9.00 am. Draw the hands of the clock on the following diagram to
show what the boy observes.

FIZIKMOZAC

(e) The student moves to the position X. He can see the image of the lamp in the plane mirror. On Figure 1.4
draw a ray diagram to show how the student sees the image of the lamp.

(ii) What is the characteristics of the image?

___________________________________
2.

Diagram 1 shows the side mirrors of a car which helps the driver to see objects behind the car more
effectively.

(a) State the type of mirror used.

..........................................................
[1 mark]
(b) Give one reason why this type of mirror is used instead of a plane mirror.
..........................................................
(c) In Diagram 2, F is the focal point and C is the centre of curvature of a convex mirror.

[1 mark]

FIZIKMOZAC

(i)

Complete the ray diagram in Diagram 2 to show the position of the image formed.
[ 2 marks]
(ii) State two characteristics of the image formed.
.....................................................
.....................................................
[2 marks]

3. SPM 2008 Paper 2 A2

A pencil is placed in front of a concave mirror. Diagram 2.1 shows the image of the pencil in the mirror.

(a) Name the phenomenon involved in the formation of the image.

[1 mark]
(b) The image is upright and magnified. State one other characteristic of the image.

[1 mark]
(c) Diagram 2.2 shows an incomplete ray diagram. C is the centre of curvature and F is the principle
focus. Complete the ray diagram to show how the image is formed.

FIZIKMOZAC

4. SPM 2010 Question 8

Diagram 7.1 shows an object O placed in front of a concave mirror.

Diagram 7.1
F is the focal length of the mirror and C is the centre of curvature.
i.
What is the meaning of focal point?
[1 mark]
ii.

.......................................................
Draw a ray diagram on Diagram 7.1 to show how the image is formed.

iii.

Diagram 7.2 shows the cross-section of a concave reflector used in a torchlight.

[3 marks]

FIZIKMOZAC

Ray S from the filament bulb is incident at point Q on the concave reflector.
(i) Complet the path of ray S on Diagram 7.2.
[2 marks]
(ii) State the light phenomenon involved in 7(c)(i).
.................................................
[1 mark]

iv.

The torchlight in Diagram 7.2 does not produce bright parallel rays. Suggest a modification that can
be made to produce bright parallel rays through these aspects:
(i)The position of the bulb
.....................................................
[1 mark]
(ai) The curvature of the reflector.

v.

[1 mark]

.....................................................
Suggest one other method to produce brighter rays by the torchlight shown in Diagram 7.2.
........................................................
[1 mark]

FIZIKMOZAC

5.2

Diagram 1 shows the pencil looks as if it is bent.

Diagram 2 shows the fish appears closer to the surface of water.
Light travels in a straight line through transparent materials such as air, water and glass.
If light passes through two materials of different optical densities, it will change direction. The light bent.
This phenomenon is called the refraction of light.
Explain refraction of light

Activity 1: Terms regarding refraction of light

Mark the angle i and r.

__________________ = the light ray that is directed onto to the boundary of the surface of the medium (in
the first medium)

FIZIKMOZAC

__________________ = the light ray that is refracted when passing through in the second medium
__________________ = A line at right angles to the boundary of the surface of the medium,ON
Angle of _________, i = the angle between the incident ray and the normal.
Angle of _________, r = the angle between the refracted ray and the normal

Activity 2: Direction of refraction:

Draw on the diagrams above the directions of the refracted rays. Label i and r.
light travels from a less dense
medium to a denser medium,

The ray is
refracted
___________
the normal
line.
i __ r.
The speed of
light _______.

Llight travels from a more

the ray is
dense medium to a less dense
refracted
medium,
___________
the normal
line
i ___ r.
The speed of
light _______.
When a ray of light is incident
normally to the glass block,

the refracted
ray is
___________

Activity 3: Refraction of Light

Aim: ______________________________________
__________________________________________
Hypothesis : _______________________________
___________________________________________
Manipulated variable: ________________________
Responding variable: ________________________
Fixed variable

: ________________________

FIZIKMOZAC

Apparatus : Glass block, power supply, protractor, ray box with single slit, ruler and a piece of paper.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Place a glass block on a paper. Trace the outline of the glass block. Remove the glass block and draw a
normal through point Q.
Using a protractor, construct several angles of incidence, i of 30, 40, 50, 60 and 70.
Replace the glass block back onto the paper. Direct a ray of light at Q along the line drawn so that the
angle of incidence is 30. Mark the path of the emergent ray at W with two crosses.
Remove the glass block. Join the two crosses with a straight line until it touches the outline of the glass
block at W. draw the path of the refracted ray by joining the point Q and W
Measure and record the angle of refraction, r.
Repeat steps 3,4 and 5 for the other angles of incidence.
Plot a graph of sin i against sin r
i/

r/

Sin i

Sin r

30
40
50
60
70
Discussion
1. What is the direction of the light when it travels from air to glass?

2.

Why the refraction of light occurs?

3.

What can you say about the angle of refraction, r when the angle of incidence, i increases?

4.

State the relationship between sin i and sin r.

5.

Calculate the gradient of the graph sin i against sin r. Show on the graph.

Sin i
Sin r

FIZIKMOZAC

6.

Deduced Snells law based on the gradient of the graph.

7.

Give a conclusion for the refractive index of the glass block based on your experiment.

___________________________________________
State the law of refraction of light

Define refractive index

For light rays passing through a vacuum into a given medium, the refractive index , n for the medium is
defined as
n = sin i (vacuum)
sin r (medium)
A material with a higher refractive index has a higher density.
The value of refractive index , n 1
The refractive index has no units.
Relate refractive index with the speed of light

Light travels fastest in vacuum and its speed decreases when it enters another medium.

The refraction of light is caused by the change in velocity of light when it passes from a medium to
another medium.

The refractive index of a medium is equal to the ratio of speed of light in vacuum (air) to the speed of
light in a medium
n = speed of light in vacuum
speed of light in medium

GRAPH Sin i vs Sin r

FIZIKMOZAC

Activity 3
1. The light ray travels in air and glass.

FIZIKMOZAC

(a) Which medium is air? ..

(b) In which medium the speed of light is higher?
Why?

7.

Calculate the speed of light in glass. Given c

= 3 x 108 m s-1 and refractive index of glass is
1.50.

.
2.

3.

Calculate the refractive index of medium x.

The light ray travels from air to medium x.

Find the:
(a) incident angle .
(b) refracted angle..
(c) refractive in

Activity 4: Real Depth and Apparent Depth

1. Put a coin in a cup, as shown in Diagram (a)
and (b). Try to look at the round edge at the
bottom o the cup and spot the coin. Without
changing the position of your eye, slowly fill
the cup with water.

4.

A light ray travels from glass to air. The

refractive index of glass is 1.54 and the speed
of light in air is 3 x 108 ms-1. Calculate
(a)
the angle of refraction,
(b)
the speed of light in glass.

Explain the phenomenon that you observed.

______________________________________

5.

6.

The rays are refracted away from the normal

as they leave the water.
When the light reaches the eye of the person,
it appears to come from a virtual fish, I which
is above the real fish O.

A light ray is incident normally on a glass

prism which has a refractive index of 1.50.
(a) complete the ray diagram.
(b) Find the incident angle and the refractive
angle

Calculate the refractive index of water

Real depth, H = the actual distance of the real

objects, O from the surface of water.
Apparent depth, h = distance of the virtual image,
I from the surface of water.
Refractive index = n = Real depth
= H
Apparent depth
h
2.

Draw a ray diagram from point 0 to the eye to

show how the object appear nearer to the
surface of water

FIZIKMOZAC

...

5.

A man try to shoot a fish as seen by him in

water. His shooting does not hit the fish.

Why his shooting fails to hit the fish. .

What is the method if the man wants to fire

the fish in the lake?

Object O
3.

What is the refractive index of the glass?

6.

4.

Why the man legs

stand inside the
water appear to be
shorter?

TUTORIAL 5.2
1.
A.
B.
C.
2.

Refraction of light occurs when light travels

through two medium with different densities.
This is due to a change in
the amplitude of light
the intensity of light
the speed of light.
Which of the following situations does not
show the refraction of light?

Why does the paddle partially immersed in

water appear bent?

....................................................................................

FIZIKMOZAC

3.

A light ray travels from medium A to medium

B. If the density of medium A is larger than
the density of medium B, which diagram
shows the correct path of the light?

4.

The diagram shows a light ray travels from air

to plastic.

What is the refractive index of plastic?

A
Sin S
B
Sin P
Sin Q
Sin R
C
5.

Sin Q
Sin R

Sin R
Sin S

A light ray travels from cooking oil to air.

FIZIKMOZAC

If the refractive index of cooking oil is 1.4,

calculate the value of angle K?
A. 44.4
D. 45.6
B. 54.5
E. 55.4
C. 58.9
6.

A light ray travels from air to glass.

What is the index of refraction of glass?

A. 1.38
C. 1.45
B. 1.51
D. 1.62
7.

An observer cannot see the coin in an empty

glass as shown in Figure(a). However , he can
see the coin when the glass is filled with
water as shown in Figure(b).

Figure (a)
Figure (b)
The observer can see the coin in Figure (b)
due to
A. the total internal reflection of light
B. the refraction of light
C. the reflection of light
D. the diffraction of light
8.

The diagram shows a boy appearing shorter

when he is in a swimming pool. The depth of
the water in the pool is 1.2 m.
[ Refractive index of water = 1.33 ]

What is the apparent depth of the pool?

A. 0.1 m
B. 0.3 m
C. 0.9 m

FIZIKMOZAC

D.
E.
9.

1.1 m
1.6 m

The diagram shows a light ray directed into a

glass block. Which is the angle of refraction?

10. Table 2 shows the refractive indices of water

and glass.
Substance
Refractive
index, n
Water
1.3
Glass
1.5
Based on the information in Table 2, which
light ray, A, B, C, or D in Diagram 14 is
correct? (2008)

11. Diagram below shows the appearance of the word PHYSICS as seen through a magnifying lens.

Which light phenomenon explains this situation? (2010)

A. Reflection
B. Refraction
C. Diffraction
D. Total internal reflection
12. Diagram 21 shows a ray of light propagating from air to water.

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 21
What is the refractive index of the water? (2010)
A. 0.75
B. 0.92
C. 1.34
D. 2.39
13.

Diagram below shows the apparent position of a fish as seen by an observer standing by a lake.

At which point , A, B, C or D is the actual position of the fish? (2009)

14. Diagram 17 shows a ray of light directed to a glass block.

Which statement is correct?( 2011)

A. The light refracts towards normal as it enters the glass block.
B. The incident angle is equal to the refracted angle.
C. The light travels faster as it enters the glass block
D. The brightness of light increases as it travels in the glass block.
15. Diagram 16 shows a light ray propagating from water to air. The refractive index of water is 1.33.

FIZIKMOZAC

What I the angle of refraction? (2012)

A. 22.1
B. 41.7
C. 48.8
D. 60.0
PAPER 2 SECTION A
1. Diagram 2 shows a light ray passing through a glass prism.

vi.

Name the phenomenon involved.

..................................................................
[1 mark]

vii.

Why does the phenomenon in (a) occur.

....................................................................
[1 mark]

viii.

What is the refraction angle?

....................................................................
[1 mark]
ix.

Calculate the refractive index of the glass prism.

[2 marks]

7. Question 4 (SPM 2003)

Figure 3.1 shows a mother observing the legs of her son in the pool. His legs appear to be shorter because
of a light phenomenon.

FIZIKMOZAC

(a)(i) Name the light phenomenon involved.

__________________________
(ii) Explain how this phenomenon occurs.

__________________________
(iii) In Figure 3.2, draw a ray diagram from point P to the eye to show how the legs appear shorter.

(b)

The depth of water is 0.4 m

Calculate the distance of the image of the foot at point P from the surface of the water.
[Refractive index of water = 1.22]

2. Question 7 SPM 2012

(a) Diagram 7.1 shows a ruler appeared bend in water.

FIZIKMOZAC

(i)Name the light phenomena involved. [1 mark]

..
(ii)Explain how the light phenomena in 7(a)(i) happened?

[1 mark]

(b) Diagram 7.2 shows a man shooting a fish as seen by him in water. His shooting does not hit the fish.

(i)Give one reason why his shooting fails to hit the fish.

[1 mark]

..
On Diagram 7.2,
(ii)draw two light rays to determine the actual position of the fish

[2 mark]

(iii)mark with X the actual position of the fish.

[1 mark]
(c) Give one suggestion how to shoot the fish accurately.

[1 mark]

..
(d) The speed of light in air and in water are 3.0 x 108 ms-1 and 2.25 x 108 respectively.
Calculate:
(i)The refractive index of water

[1 mark]

FIZIKMOZAC

(ii)The real depth of fish in water when the apparent depth is 1.8 m.

[2 marks]

5.3

Explain total internal reflection of light

1.

When light enters from a denser medium to a less dense

medium, it is refracted __________________ the normal. A
small part of the incident ray is _________ inside the glass.

2.

As the angle of incidence increases, the angle of refraction

____________. The angle of refraction reaches ____ degree
before the angle of incidence does. At this moment, the light
refracted along the glass-air __________. The angle of
incidence in the denser medium at this limit is called the
_________ angle, c.

3. If the angle of incidence is increased further so that it is

greater than the critical angle, the light is not refracted
anymore, but is internally _________. This phenomenon is
called ________ ________ ___________.
Critical Angle :
_______________________________________________________
2 conditions for total internal reflection to occur:
1. ____________________________________________________________________
2. ___________________________________________________________________

Activity 1: Total Internal Reflections and Critical Angle

Aim: To show the effect of increasing the angle of incidence on the angle of refraction when light travels
from a denser medium to a less dense medium
Apparatus: Ray box, semicircular glass block, protractor

is

FIZIKMOZAC

Procedure:
1. Trace the outline of the glass block on a
piece of paper and mark the centre of the
glass block as O. Draw the normal line,
N.
2. Direct a light ray towards O from the
curved edge with angle of incidence i =
20. Observe the ray emerging from the
glass block.
3. Increase the angle of incidence slowly
and observe the change in the refracted
angle.

4.
5.

When the refracted angle is 90, mark the angle of incidence, i. Measure and the record the value of i.
Increase the value of i and observe the direction of the ray after reaching the border between the two
mediums.

Results:
1. If the angle of refraction, r < 90,
(a) light ray is refracted _________________ normal.
(b) as the incident angle increases, the angle of refraction ____________.
2.

When the refracted angle is 90, the angle of incidence, i = __________.

3.

When the incidence angle is further increased, the ray upon reaching the border between the two
mediums will be ______________________________

4.

Complete the following diagram based from your observation in 1,2 and 3.

Observation 1
i <c

Observation 2
i=c

Observation 3
i>c

Discussion:
3.

Explain why the light ray must be directed at the centre of the glass block from the curved edge?
________________________________________________________________

4.

The incident angle which results in the refracted angle of 90 = critical angle.
What is the critical angle, c of the glass block used? _________

5.

Describe the path of the light ray at the straight edge of the glass block for each case.
(a) i < c: ________________________________________________________
(b) i = c: _________________________________________________________
(c) i > c : ________________________________________________________

FIZIKMOZAC

90o between Critical Angle, c and Refractive Index, n

Relationship
Referring to figure d and using Snells law,
write an equation that gives the relationship
between the critical angle, C, the refracted
angle and the refractive index of liquid-Y

Air
Exercise 1
1.

Liquid-Y

The refractive index of water is 1.33. What is the critical angle of the water.

2.

Figure 2 shows three light rays, X, Y and Z,

incident at the mid-point of AB of a semi circular
glass block of critical angle 42. <NOZ = 30 ,
<NOY = 42 and <NOX = 60.
Draw the direction of the rays of X, Y and Z from O
and label them as X, Y and Z respectively.

3.

Predict what will happen to the incident light ray

shown in the image. Support your answer with
calculations. (Refractive index of water is 1.3)

4. The diagram shows a light ray entering in a glass prism. [ Refractive

index of glass = 1.51 ]
(a) Determine the critical angle of the glass.

(b) Draw the ray light after it passes through a point P until the
direction of the ray of light unchanged.
5.

The diagram shows a

light ray travelling from
air into a glass prism. What is the critical angle of the glass?

1.

Exercise 2
Complete the ray diagram

FIZIKMOZAC

TUTORIAL 5.3
1

Which of the following shows total internal reflection?

(2003

The diagram shows light ray XO experiencing total

internal reflection when traveling from glass to air.

FIZIKMOZAC

Which statements about total internal reflection are

correct?
P is more than the critical angle of glass
Q The speed of light in glass is
higher than in air.
R The refractive index of glass is greater than air.
(2004)
A. P and Q
C. P and R
B. Q and R
D. P, Q and R
3

The diagram shows a light ray, P, directed into a glass

block. The critical angle of the glass is 42.
In which direction does the light move from point Q?
(2005)

The diagram shows a cross-section of a fiber optic

cable.

Which comparison is correct? (2003)

A. Density of P < density of Q
B. Density of P > density of Q
C. Density of P = density of Q

The diagram (i) and diagram (ii)

show light rays traveling from glass
to air at different incident angles.

FIZIKMOZAC

Which angle is the critical angle of

the glass? (2006)
A. P
B. Q
C. R
D. S
6.

7.

8.

Which diagram shows a ray hitting a semi-circular

glass block at the critical angle, ? (2008)

The critical angle of a type of coloured liquid is

48. Which diagram shows the total internal
reflection? (2009)

Diagram 17 shows the path of light from P to Q.

FIZIKMOZAC

The critical angle of water is 48. If = 48, which is the correct path of light after passing through
point O?
OR
OS
OT
OU
9. (SPM 1993)
Figure 3.1 shows that a light ray being incident perpendicularly to the surface PQ of a glass prism PQR. The
refractive index of the prism is 1.5.

Figure 3.1
(e) Find the angle of incidence at the surface PR.
(f)

Calculate the critical angle of the prism.

(g) (i) Explain what happen to the

light ray after if strikes the surface PR.

_____________________________
(ii)State the condition for the phenomenon in (c)(i) above to take place.
_____________________________
_____________________________
(h) Another identical glass prism XYZ is arranged as shown in Figure 8.2 below. Two parallel light rays K
and L are incident perpendicularly onto the surface PQ.

(i)

In the diagram, draw the correct path of the light rays K and L until they emerge from the prism XYZ.

FIZIKMOZAC

(ii) Name the device which uses the above arrangement of prism.
__________________________
10. Question 6: Spm 2006
Diagram 16.1 shows a submarine equipped with an optical instrument P. Diagram 16.2 shows the structure
of the optical instrument P.

(e) Name the optical instrument P.

.....................................................
[1]
(f)

In Diagram 16.2, two glass prisms must be placed so that the object can be seen by the observer.
The position of one of the glass prisms is as shown.
(i) In box A in Diagram 4.2, draw and shade the second prism.
[1]
(ii) Explain why the prisms in optical instrument P are placed as in 16(b)(i).
................................................
[1]

FIZIKMOZAC

(g) (i) In Diagram 4.2, complete the path of the light ray from the object to the observers eye.
[1]
(ii)State one characteristic of the image observed.
________________________
[1]
(h) The refractive index of the glass prism is 1.52.
Calculate the critical angle of the glass prism.
[2]

11. Question 5 SPM 2007

Diagram 1 and diagram 2 shows a light ray passing through prism P and prism Q, respectively.
Prism P and prism Q are made of glass with different densities.

Diagram 1
Diagram 2
(a) What is meant by critical angle? Thick () the correct answer in the box provided.
_____ The angle of incidence when the angle of refraction is 90.
_____ The angle of incidence when the incident ray is totally reflected.
[1 m]
(b) Explain why the light ray does not bend when it enters both prisms at point A.
_____________________________
[1 m]
(c) (i) Based on Diagram 1 and Diagram 2, how can the angle of incidence at point B be made equal to the
critical angle? [2 m]
Prism P: _____________________
Prism Q: _____________________
(ii) Diagram 1 shows the light ray passing from glass to air at point B. Compare the density of glass
with the density of air.
_____________________________
[1 m]
(iii) Based on Diagram 1 and Diagram 2, what happen to the light ray after passing point B?
Diagram 1: ___________________
Diagram 2: ___________________
[2 m]
(d) Name the phenomenon shown in Diagram 2.

12. SPM 2011 Question 8

[1 m]

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 8.1 shows an incomplete light ray path entering a glass prism. The refractive index of the glass
prism is 1.5.

Diagram 8.1
(a)(i) Calculate the critical angle of the glass prism.

[2 marks]
(ii) On Diagram 8.1, complete the light ray path from point O. 8(a)(ii)
[2 marks]
(ii)

Based on the answer in 8(a)(ii), name the light phenomenon involved.

................................................................
[ 1 mark]
(b) Diagram 8.2 shows prism binoculars. The position of two prisms on one side of the binoculars are as
shown.

Diagram 8.2
Diagram 8.3 is a schematic diagram of Diagram 8.2. On Diagram 8.3, draw the ray path entering both prisms.
In your drawing, indicate the direction of the ray path.

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 8.3

[2 marks]

(c) Objective lens is used in the binoculars so that the object can be seen clearer. Table 8 shows the
characteristics of three lenses.
Lens
Kanta

Focal length
Panjangfokus

Diameter of the
lens

1.0 cm

small

10.0 cm

big

100.0 cm

big

Table 8
Based on Table 8, state the suitable characteristics of the lens to be used as the objective lens. Give one
reason for the suitable characteristics.
(i)

Focal length of the lens:

...............................................................
Reason:
................................................................
[2 marks]
(ii)

Diameter of the lens:

FIZIKMOZAC

................................................................
Reason:
................................................................
[2 marks]
(d) Based on the answers in 8(c)(i) and 8(c)(ii), determine the most suitable lens to be used as the objective
lens.
................................................................
[2 marks]

5.4

Introduction to Lenses
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

A lens is a _____________ material which consists of at least one curved surface.

Images formed by lenses due to the phenomenon of ______________ of light.
Rays of light traveling through the optical centre pass through the lens in a __________ line.
Rays of light from objects at infinity ( distant objects) are _____________ rays.
The lenses have two basic shapes. Some are thicker in the middle and thinner at the edges. These are
_________ lenses.
Other lenses are thinner in the middle and thicker at the edges. These are __________ lenses.

Types of lenses : Name the types of lenses shown below.

(i)

FIZIKMOZAC

a.

b.

c.

a.

b.

c.

(ii)

Explain focal point and focal length

Activity 1: Focal point and focal length
Apparatus : _________________________________________________
Procedure:
1. Direct a set of parallel rays to a
cylindrical convex lens. Observe the
rays that pass through the lens.
2. Trace the parallel light rays before
and after passing through the lens.
Measure the distance between this
point and the centre of the lens.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 by using a
cylindrical concave lens.
Draw the rays diagram when the parallel lights passes through a convex lens and concave lens.
Convex lens

Concave lens

The light is _______________ and _____________ to a point ____________ the convex lenses
The light is ___________ and ___________ from a point ___________ of the concave lenses.

What can you say about the focal point and the focal length when the lens is thicker?

Activity 2: Focal length and focal point

Apparatus: Lens holder, white screen, metre rule, a convex lens.
Procedure:

FIZIKMOZAC

1.

2.

3.

Align and adjust

the screen and
lens so that a
sharp image of a
distant object falls
on the screen.
Measure and
record the
distance between
lens and the
screen.
Mark the focal
point and label
the focal length
for the lens on a
piece of paper

Results:
Focal length = ________ cm

Exercise 1: Characteristics of image formed by a convex lens :

(Construction of ray diagram method)
Construct ray diagrams for each of the following cases and state the characteristics of the image formed.
i) Case 1 : u > 2f
where u = object distance ; and f = focal length of lens.

Lens
object

F
2F

Characteristics of image: ______________________________________________

ii) Case 2 : u = 2f

Lens
object

F
2F

Characteristics of image:_______________________________________________
iii) Case 3 : 2f > u > f

Lens

object
2F

F
F

FIZIKMOZAC

Characteristics of image: ______________________________________

iv) Case 4 : u = f

Lens
object

2F

Characteristics of image: ____________________________________

v) Case 5 : u < f

Lens
object
F
2F

Characteristics of image: ___________________________________

Conclusion:
Object distance ,u
u<f
u=f
f <u< 2f
u = 2f
u > 2f
u=

Characteristics of image

In each of the following statements below, fill in the space provide one of the following conditions.
( u > 2f / 2f = u / 2f > u > f / u > f / u < f )
i)

To obtain a real image, the object must be placed at a distance u such that ____________
ii) To obtain a virtual image, the object must be placed at a distance u such that ____________
Characteristics of image formed by concave lens :
(by construction of ray diagrams )
Construct a ray diagram for each of the following and
state the characteristics of the image formed
Lens
i)

object

F
2F

FIZIKMOZAC

Characteristics of image: ________________________________________

ii)

Lens
object

F
2F

Characteristics of image : __________________________________________

Note: Image formed by a concave lens is always _____________, _____________ and _________ on the same
side of the lens as the object.
Activity 3: Relationship between u, v and f
Aim : to find the relationship between object distance, u and image distance, v and focal length, f of a lens.
Apparatus: light bulb / candle light, convex lens (f = 10 cm), metre rule, white screen, lens holder.
Procedure:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Arrange the apparatus.

Adjust the position of the lens until u = 40.0 cm
Adjust the screen in order to form a sharp image on it. Measure and record the image distance, v.
Repeat procedures 3 and 4 for u = 35.0 cm, 30.0 cm, 25.0 cm, 20.0 cm and 15.0 cm.

u / cm

40.0

35.0

30.0

v/cm
1/u /cm-1
1/v /cm-1
Plot the graph of 1/v against 1/u and paste on this page.
Find :
the y- intercepts : _________

the gradient:

25.0

20.0

15.0

FIZIKMOZAC

Deduce how the values of the intercepts relate to the focal length of the lens.

Write down the relationship between the object distance, u, image distance, v and focal length, f of a lens.

Exercise 2 : Lens Equation

1.

An object is placed 30 cm from a convex lens with a focal

length of 20 cm.
(a) How far from the lens is the image?
(b) What is the magnification produced by the lens?
(c) What is the nature of the image?

2. An object is placed 10 cm from a convex lens with a focal length of

cm.
(a)How far from the lens is the image?
(b)What magnification does the lens produce?
(c)What is the nature of the image?

3. An object is placed 30 cm from a concave lens with a focal length of 20

cm.
(a)How far from the lens is the image?
(b)What magnification does the lens produce?
(c)What is the nature of the image?

The Uses of Lenses in Optical Devices

Magnifying glass/ Simple microscope
1. Application : to ___________ the image.
2. It consists of a single ________ lens
3. An object is placed at a position _____ than the focal length of the lens. u < f
3. The image formed is _____________, _________ and ____________
4. The magnifying power _________ if the focal length of the lens is shorter.
5. A sharper and larger image is seen at the near point of the eye. In
general, the near point is taken as 25 cm.

20

FIZIKMOZAC

Compound Microscope
1. It consists of two powerful _______ lenses of short focal lengths
( 5.0 cm 10.0 cm)
2. The lens which receives light rays from the object is called the _________ lens. The lens which is used for
viewing the final image is called the __________ lens.
3. The focal length of the objective lens is fo whereas the focal length of the eyepiece lens is fe. fo is
_________ than fm.
4. The object is placed at a distance between _________________ so that the image formed is _______,
________ and ____ in front of the eyepiece lens.
5. The position of the eyepiece lens is adjusted until the position of the first image is ____ than fe from the
eyepiece lens.
6. The final image formed is ________, _________ and ________
Draw the ray diagram for microscope:

Astronomical Telescope
1. It consists of an _________ lens and an __________ lens. fo is _________ than fm.
2. The objective lens is used to receive light rays from distant object.
3. The first image formed is at the focal point of the objective lens F o. It is _____, ________ and __________
4. The first image now becomes the object for the eyepiece lens.
5. The __________ lens is adjusted so that the first image is situated at the focal point of the eyepiece lens,
Fe.
6. The final image formed is at _______. The telescope is said to be in
normal adjustment.

FIZIKMOZAC

7. For normal adjustment of the telescope, the separation between the two lenses is fo + fe.

8. The magnification of the telescope is given by:

m=

TUTORIAL 5.4
1

The diagram shows an object which is placed at u

cm from the centre of a convex lens. The focal
length of the lens is 20 cm.

fo
fe

FIZIKMOZAC

Which of the following characteristics of the image

is not correct when u is 10 cm, 15 cm, 35 cm and 45
cm form the lens? (2004)
A
B
C
D
2

u/cm
10
15
35
45

Characteristics of image
Virtual and bigger
Virtual and bigger
Real and smaller
Real and smaller

A student draws light rays passing through lenses P,

Q, R and S as shown in the diagram below. F is the
focal point of lenses P, Q, R and S.

Which drawing shows the correct path of the light

rays? (2005)
A. II only
B. I and III only
C. I, II and IV only
D. I, II, III and IV

The diagram shows the formation of the image of an

object by a convex lens.

If the height of the object is 2 cm, what is the height

of the image? (2006)
A. 6.50 cm
B. 4.50 cm
C. 4.00 cm
D. 3.25 cm
E. 2.25 cm
4

The diagram shows the design of a simple

FIZIKMOZAC

astronomical telescope.
The focal length of the lens P is fP and the focal
length of lens Q is fQ.

Which statement is correct? (2003)

A. fP shorter than fQ
B. The power of lens P is higher than lens Q.
C. The image of lens P is real whereas the image of
lens Q is virtual
D. The image magnification is the ratio of fQ to fP

Which of the following ray diagrams is correct for a

magnifying glass? (2007)

A lens has a focal length f. What are the required

conditions for the lens to be used as a magnifying
lens? (2008)
A
B
C
D

Type of lens
Convex
Convex
Concave
Concave

Object distance
Less than f
Between f and 2f
Less than f
Between f and 2f

FIZIKMOZAC

Diagram 15 shows the apparatus used to determine

the relationship between the object distance, u, the
image distance, v, and the focal length of a convex
lens.

The results are shown in Diagram 16.

What is the value of q? (2008)

8.

Which ray diagram is correct for a convex lens? (2009)

FIZIKMOZAC

9. Question 4 (SPM 2004)

Figure 4.1 shows an image of letters FIZI when viewed through a glass of water.

(a) State the light phenomenon that causes the image FIZI to be enlarged.
_________________________
(b)What is the change of size of the image if the water is replaced with a transparent liquid of a greater
density?
______________________________
(c)The glass of water is replaced with a lens M with focal length of 10 cm. The distance between the book
cover and the centre of the lens is 8 cm. It is observed that the image FIZIK is enlarged.
(i)

Name the type of lens M.

___________________

(ii)

Calculate the distance of the image from lens M.

(iii)

In the space below sketch a ray diagram to show how the image is formed.

FIZIKMOZAC

10. Question 6 (SPM 2000)

An object is placed at different distances u in front of a convex lens K. the corresponding characteristics of
image formed are as shown in the table below.
Object distance,
u (cm)
5
10
15

Image characteristics
Virtual, upright, larger
Formed at infinity

20
25

Real, inverted, same size

Infinity

Real, inverted, formed at focal

point

(a)(i) Based on the information given in the table, state the focal length of lens K.

(ii)Give two reasons for your answer in (a)(i)

_________________________
_________________________
(b)Complete the information in the table above.
(c)An image is formed on the screen when an object is placed 20 cm from lens K. A black cardboard is
placed in front of lens K so as to close the lower portion of the lens. State the changes to the image
formed, if any.
_________________________
(d)A student intends to build a telescope. He uses lens K as the eyepiece lens and another convex lens as
the objective lens.
(i)

State the focal length that is suitable for the objective lens
______________________

(ii) If the student wishes to build the telescope in normal adjustment, what is the separation between
lens K and the objective lens?
_______________________
11. Question 8 SPM 2009
Diagram 8.1 shows an image seen through a lens.

FIZIKMOZAC

(a) Name the light phenomenon involved in Diagram 8.1

[1 mark]
(b) On Diagram 8.2, draw a ray diagram to show how the image in Diagram 8.1 is formed.

[3 marks]
(c) The focal length of the lens in Diagram 8.2 is f. Referring to f, suggest a suitable position to place
the object to produce an inverted image.

[1 mark]
(d) An eye piece of focal length, fe = 5 cm, and an objective lens are used to build a simple
astronominical telescope. The objective lens is chosen from Table 8.1.

Lens

Focal
length of
lens, fo
(cm)

Magnificaction

Diameter
of the
objective
lens (cm)

10

2.5

10

5.0

40

2.5

40

5.0

FIZIKMOZAC

(i)

Complete Table 8.1 by writing down the values of m for every lens.
[2 marks]

ai. Choose the two lenses that produce the largest image.
.
[1 mark]
iii.

Give one reason for the answer in 8(d)(ii).

.
[1 mark]

iv.

Choose the two lenses that produce the brightest image.

.
[1 mark]

v.

Give one reason for the answer in 8(d)(iv).

.

vi.

[1 mark]
Based on the answers in 8(d)(ii) and 8(d)(iv), choose the most suitable lens as the objective lens.
.....
[1 mark]

Essay Question
Question 3: SPM 2004
Figures(a) and (b) show the parallel rays of light directed toward the curved mirrors, J and K. CP is the radius
of curvature, and F is the focal point of the mirrors.

a.

What is meant by focal length.

.............................................................
b.

Using Figure (a) and (b) , compare the curvature of the mirrors J and K and the effects on reflected rays.
State the relationship between the curvature of the mirrors and their focal lengths.

................................................................
................................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
c.

Figure(c) shows a cross section of a parabolic reflector used in a car headlamp. The headlamp has two
bulbs , X and Y. Bulb X is located at the focal point of the reflector while bulb Y is above bulb X.

FIZIKMOZAC

Explain what happens to the light rays from the bulb when only:
(i)
bulb X is switched on
(ii)
bulb Y is switched on
You may use diagrams to illustrate your answers.
.............................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
.
d.

You are given two pieces of plane

mirror measuring 5 cm x 6 cm to make a periscope.
(i) Using these mirrors and other materials, describe how you would make the periscope.

(ii) Explain why the image observed through the periscope using plane mirrors are not very clear.
.............................................................
.............................................................
(aj) Suggest modification that can be made to the periscope to produce clearer and bigger images.
..............................................................
.............................................................
2. SPM 2008 (Question 11)
Diagram 11.1 shows a light signal travelling through an optical fibre made of glass.

FIZIKMOZAC

(a) Name the light phenomenon involved at Y.

[1 mark]

...............................................................
(b) (i) State two changes that happen to the light ray when it passes from air into the optical fibre at
X.
[2 marks]
.........................................................
.........................................................
(ii)

Explain why the light ray follows the path shown in Diagram 11.1 when it hits the wall of the
optical fibre at Y.
[2 marks]

...........................................................
..........................................................
optical fibre

Features
of optical
fibre

Single
fine
optical
fibres
Bundle of
fine
parallel
optical
fibres
Bundle of
fine
parallel
optical
fibres
Single
fine
optical
fibres
Bundle of
fine
parallel
optical
fibres

Comparison
between
refractive
index of the
inner core, ni ,
and the outer
cladding, no

Flexibi
lity

Purity
of inner
core

ni > n o

High

Very
high

no > n i

Low

Low

ni > n o

High

Very
high

ni > n o

Low

High

no > n i

High

High

FIZIKMOZAC

(c) The optical fibre in Diagram 11.1 can be used in telecommunications and medicine. You are asked to
investigate the characteristics of optical fibres for use in these fields as shown in Table 11.
Explain the suitability of each feature of optical fibre in Table 11 for use in telecommunications and
medicine. Determine the most suitable optical fibre that is capable of carrying the largest number of
signals simultaneously.
[10 marks]

(d) Diagram 11.2 and Diagram 11.3 show a ray of light passing into glass and diamond respectively.
[Refractive index : Glass = 1.50; Diamond = 2.42]

FIZIKMOZAC

(i)

Calculate the critical angle of diamond and of glass.

[2 marks]

(ii)

3.
(a)

Copy Diagram 11.2 and Diagram 11.3 and complete the path of the light ray in glass and in
diamond until it finally emerges from each object.
[3 marks]

Part C, SPM 2005

Figure 5.1 shows two convex
lenses, R and S, used in an astronomical telescope. The focal length for R is 40 cm and for S is 10 cm.

FIZIKMOZAC

Figure 5.1
(i) Define the focal length of a lens.

[1 mark]

..............................................................
(ii)Give two reasons why R is used as the objective lens of the telescope.

[2 marks]

..............................................................
............................................................

(iii)Using lenses R and S, draw a ray diagram on Figure 5.1 to show the formation of the final image by the
telescope at normal adjustment. Use a scale of 10 cm to 1 cm.
[5 m]
(iv)Calculate the magnification of the final image formed by the telescope at normal adjustment.
[2 m]

(b) Presbyopia is an inability of the eye to adjust the focusing of far and near objects. This usually
happens when we get old, where the ciliary muscle is less able to change the shape of the eye lens to
focus the image on the retina, as shown in Figures 5.2 and 5.3.
Figure 5.2

Figure 5.3

As an optician, you have three designs of lenses, X, Y and Z in your shop. The cross-section of X, Y
and Z are shown in Figure 5.4.

FIZIKMOZAC

Figure 5.4
(i)

Choose the most suitable design of lens in Figure 5.4 to correct the sight of a person with presbyopia
and explain the suitability of the design.
................................................
................................................

(ii)

Explain why the other two designs are not suitable.

.........................................................
..........................................................
..........................................................
Either low or high refractive index glass can be used to make the lenses.
(iii)
Which type of glass is most suitable to make the lens chosen in (b)(i)? Give reasons for
your choice.
[10 marks]
..............................................................
...............................................................

4. SPM 2006 question 9

Diagram 9.1 and Diagram 9.2 show the light rays from two identical objects passing through the convex
lenses, J and K. Both the lenses produce virtual images. F is the focal point for each lens.

FIZIKMOZAC

(a) (i)

What is meant by virtual

image?
[1 mark]

............................................................
(ii)

With reference to Diagram 9.1 and Diagram 9.2, compare the thickness of the lenses J and K.
Relate the size of the image with the focal length to make a deduction regarding the relationship
between the power of the lens and the focal length.
[5 marks]

............................................................
............................................................
..............................................................
(b) Explain why a piece of paper burns when placed under a convex lens aimed towards hot sun rays.
marks]

[4

.............................................................
.............................................................
.............................................................
............................................................
(c) You are given two convex lenses, P and Q, with focal lengths 40 cm and 5 cm respectively. Both the
lenses are used to build a simple astronomical telescope at normal adjustment.
(i)
Using the two lenses, explain how you are going to build the simple astronomical
telescope.
[6 marks]
(ii)

Suggest modifications that need to be done on the telescope to produce clearer and bigger
images.
[4 marks]

.................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
...............................................................

PAPER 3: ESSAY
Based on the diagrams in Questions:
(a) make one suitable inference
(b) state one appropriate hypothesis that could be investigated.
(c) describe how you would design an experiment to test your hypothesis. In your explanation, state clearly
the following :
(i)
aim of the experiment
(ii)
variables in the experiment

FIZIKMOZAC

(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)

list of apparatus and materials

arrangement of the apparatus
the procedures of the experiment, which includes the method of controlling the manipulated
variable and the method of measuring the responding variable
the way you would tabulate the data
the way you would analyse the data
[12 marks]

1. SPM 07
Diagram 3 shows two opaque cups, A and B, containing different amount of water. A similar coin is placed at
the bottom of each cup. When the coin is observed from the same position, the image of the coin in cup A
cannot be seen, but the image of the coin in cup B can be seen.

2. SPM 2011
Diagram 3.1(a) and Diagram 3.1(b) show a camera with the convex lens in different positions. The
photograph in Diagram 3.2(a) shows the image of two cars formed when the convex lens of the camera is in
the position as shown in Diagram 3.1(a). The photograph in Diagram 3.2(b) shows a bigger image of the two
cars formed when the convex lens of the camera is nearer to the cars as shown in Diagram 3.1(b).

Diagram 3.1(a)

Diagram 3.1(b)

Diagram 3.2(a)

Diagram 3.2(b)